USE AND MAINTENANCE

Head offices
Deutz-Fahr Strasse, 1
D-89415 Lauingen
Tel. (09072) 997-0
www.deutz-fahr.de
PREFACE

The manual describes options and equipment levels available throughout

the various markets and therefore some of the items covered may not
apply to your tractor.
Follow the instructions carefully.
DEUTZ-FAHR Service Centres are always at your disposal with advice
and assistance to help you use and maintain your tractor correctly.
No liability can be accepted for any injury or damage resulting from
operations that are perfomed in a manner other than that described in this
publication, or from the improper use of the tractor, or from poor
workmanship in the carrying out of maintenance operations or from failure
to observe the instructions given.
This Manual must always be kept with the tractor. Keep it with care. If in the
future you will sell your tractor, please forward this Manual to the new
tractor owner

II
Table of contents
• PREFACE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · II
• IMPORTANT · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · X
• NOTE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · X
• To the owner of the new DEUTZ-FAHR tractor· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XI

• SECTION 1 - Safety · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XIV

• Safety Alert Symbol and Terms · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XIV
• Why is SAFETY important to you?· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XIV
• Tractor and Implement Safety · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XIV
• Introduction to Safety· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XV
• Safety · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XV
• A Word to the Operator · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XV
• Danger, Warning, Caution · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XV
• Decals · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XVI
• Follow a Safety Programme · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XVII
• For Safe Operation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XVII
• General safety rules · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XVII
• Protective Structures · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXIII
• Roll Over Protective Structures · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXIII
• Operation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXIII
• Damage to the ROPS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXIV
• Cab · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXIV
• Prepare for Safe Operation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXV
• Protect Yourself · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXV
• Risks from exposure to noise· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXV
• Know Your Equipment· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXVI
• Use all Available Protective and Safety Devices· · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXVI
• Check the Equipment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXVII
• Clean the Tractor · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXIX
• Protect the Environment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXIX
• Servicing the Tractor · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXX
• Starting · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXX
• Warn Personnel before Starting · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXX
• Mount and Dismount Safely · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXI
• Start Safely · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXI
• Follow Recommended Starting Procedures · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXII
• Test the Controls · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXII
• Starting Fluid · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXII
• Work Safely · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXIII
• Making the Right Moves · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXIII
• Follow Safe Operating Practices· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXIII
• Watch out for Others · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXIV
• Risk of Overturning· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXVI
• To Avoid Side Overturns· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXVI
• To Avoid Rear Overturns · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXVII
• General Operating Hazards · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXVIII
• Implements and Attachments · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XXXIX
• Safety - Towing · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XL
• Road Transport · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XLI
• Rules of the Road · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XLI

III
 • After Operation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XLIII
• Welding work on the tractor body · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XLIII
• Safety instructions for the installation of supplementary equipment
and/or electronic components. · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XLIV
• Safety and operational decals · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · XLV
• International symbols (part. 1) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LV
• International symbols (Part. 2) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LVI
• International symbols (Part. 3) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LVII
• Metric conversion· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LVIII
• Conversion tables · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LIX
• Diesel fuels · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LXI
• Winter operation with diesel fuel · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LXII
• Fuel additives · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LXII
• Biofuels · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LXIII
• Biological contamination in tanks · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · LXIV

• SECTION 2 - REPLACEMENT PARTS· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1

• Tractor serial number · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1
• Tractor identification plate · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1
• Engine serial number · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2
• Original replacement parts · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2

• SECTION 3 - USE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5
• Checking the tractor prior to starting work · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5
• Draining water from the fuel prefilter · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 6
• Checking the engine oil level · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 7
• Access to the driving position· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8
• Adjusting the steering wheel· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 10
• Steering column stalks: direction indicators, headlights, flasher and horn · 11
• Tractor lights · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12
• Hazard warning lights switch· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 13
• Beacon · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 13
• Beacon · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 15
• Hazard warning lights switch· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 15
• Instrument panel· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 16
• A - LIGHTS ZONE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 17
• C - FUNCTINS ZONE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 19
• D - FUNCTIONS ZONE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 20
• Setting parameters with control buttons · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 21
• DIGITAL CLOCK · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 22
• Wheel constant · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 23
• BRIGHTNESS OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 24
• Dial-type engine temperature gauge· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 29
• Dial-type fuel gauge · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 29
• Engine STOP control · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 30
• Ignition switch· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 31
• Engine - first 100 work hours · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 32
• Starting the engine · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 34
• Starting with preheat: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 35
• Stopping the tractor· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 35
• Cold starting · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 37
• Emergency starting through auxiliary battery · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 38
• Turbocharging · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 39
• Adjusting the driver’s seat · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 40
IV
 • Seat with fluid suspension· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 42
• Seat belts · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 44
• Adjusting the rearview mirrors · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 45
• Control pedals · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 46
• Clutch control pedal · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 46
• Brake control pedals · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 47
• Parking brake lever · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 48
• Accelerator pedal · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 49
• Hand throttle · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 49
• Transmission controls· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 50
• Gearshifting positions with 5 speed· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 51
• For tractors without hydraulic shuttle· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 51
• Gearshifting positions with 5 speed· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 52
• Controls with gearbox for Global Spec versions, without Hi-Lo· · · · · 53
• Controls with gearbox for Global Spec versions, with Hi-Lo · · · · · · · 53
• Example of how Hi-Lo shift is used · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 54
• Hydraulic shuttle and Hi-Lo status display · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 55
• Speed selection· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 55
• Gearbox with hydraulic shuttle · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 56
• Automatic clutch button on gearshift lever · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 57
• Alarms· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 59
• Protection and safety devices on the tractor· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 60
• Rear and front differential lock · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 61
• Front-wheel drive · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 62
• “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 63
• Power take-off · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 65
• Front and rear PTO controls · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 66
• Front power take-off (1000 r.p.m.) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 68
• Front PTO clutch engagement control · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 68
• Rear power take-off· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 69
• Rear PTO clutch engagement control· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 69
• Self-Diagnosis· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 70
• Economic - 750 rpm power take-off· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 71
• Ground speed power take-off · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 72
• «SENSING» MECHANICAL LIFT ORIGINAL TYPE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 73
• Controls · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 75
• Positions of the power-lift levers under the different working conditions· 76
• Implement hitching control · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 78
• Three-point linkage· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 79
• Adjustment of the lifting rods· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 80
• Adjustment of the top link · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 80
• Adjustment of the telescopic stabilisers · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 82
• Front hydraulic lift · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 83
• Auxiliary hydraulic services control valve · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 86
• Nomenclature · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 87
• Hydraulic diagram of directional control valve· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 89
• The controls · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 90
• Connection of an implement to the auxiliary hydraulic service couplers· 96
• Checking the transmission oil level · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 97
• Converting a control valve from double-acting to single-acting · · · · · 99
• Example of connection to a single-acting cylinder· · · · · · · · · · · · · · 100
• Example connection and operation of a double-acting cylinder · · · 101

V
 • Operation of hydraulic devices that require a constant flow of oil (e.g.
hydraulic motors) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 102
• Class “A” drawbar (optional)· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 103
• Towing hitch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 104
• Class “C” towing hitch· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 105
• CLASS “C” Italy towing hitch· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 106
• Class “C” Euro manual towing hitch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 108
• Class “C” Euro automatic towing hitch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 109
• France Piton Fix towing hitch· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 111
• Class “D2" and ”D" towing hitches· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 112
• Class “C”Swizterland towing hitch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 113
• Category 2 rear drawbar· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 114
• Front towing hitch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 114
• Body · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 116
• Cab· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 118
• Standard cab · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 120
• Ventilation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 120
• Controls located in the cab roof lining · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 122
• Working lamps switches · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 122
• Front working lamps switch· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 122
• Rear working lamps switch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 122
• Pivotable headlight control · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 122
• Front screen wiper control· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 122
• Rear window wiper washer pump control · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 122
• Ventilation-heating-air conditioning (for tractors with standard roof) 123
• Controls · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 123
• Heating system · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 124
• Air conditioning system · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 126
• High-visibility roof · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 128
• Ventilation-heating-air conditioning · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 128
• Controls · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 128
• Opening roof hatch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 131
• Sun blind · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 131
• Front hatch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 131
• Sun roll-up canvas · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 131
• Rear hatch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 132
• Cab ceiling lamp · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 133
• Radio AM/FM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 133
• Cigar lighter· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 133
• Storage compartment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 133
• Access flap providing an opening through which cables for external
equipment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 134
• Hazard warning sign · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 135
• Wheel chock · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 135
• Tool box · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 135
• Wedge support · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 136
• Mounting for trailer brake control (Italy version) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 136

• SECTION 4 - WHEELS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 137

• Track adjustment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 137
• Tyre inflation pressures· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 138
• Row crop tires · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 139
• Running direction of tires · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 140
• Adjusting steering stops · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 140

VI
 • Adjustable track wheels · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 141
• Permissible tyre combinations · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 142
• Track width adjustment for wheels with adjustable rims · · · · · · · · · 143
• Front wheels · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 143
• Rear wheels · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 144
• Front wheel track adjustment (2-W.D. Tractor) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 150
• Tyres for 2-wheel drive tractors· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 150
• Ballast · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 153
• Front ballast · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 153
• Rear ballast· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 154
• Ballasting by filling the tyres with water + antifreeze solution · · · · · 154
• Filling the tyre with water· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 155
• Draining water from the tyre · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 155
• Hydraulic trailer braking · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 156
• Mixed-automatic air braking system (optional) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 157

• SECTION 5 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 161

• Lubrificants and fluids· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 163
• Maintenance intervals · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 164
• Maintenance and inspection schedule · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 166
• Fuel storage · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 169
• Refueling· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 169
• Refueling at the end of the working day · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 170
• Drain plug · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 170
• Raising the engine hood · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 171
• Engine maintenance · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 171
• Removing the side panels· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 171
• Checking the oil level · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 174
• Changing the engine oil · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 174
• Changing the engine oil filters· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 176
• Changing the engine oil filters· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 176
• Draining water from the fuel filter · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 177
• Changing the fuel filters · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 178
• Bleeding air from the fuel system · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 178
• Fuel feed circuit bleed pump · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 180
• Fuel· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 180
• Air filter · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 181
• Air cleaner servicing instructions· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 182
• Cleaning the air filter · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 184
• Engine cooling system · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 186
• Checking the level of coolant in the expansion tank · · · · · · · · · · · · 186
• AKROS FREEZE liquid coolant · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 186
• Changing the coolant/antifreeze mixture and flushing the cooling system· 187
• Thermostat · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 187
• Cleaning the engine radiator · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 188
• Maintenance of fuel coolers · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 189
• Servicing the transmission oil cooler· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 190
• Cleaning the front screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 191
• Adjusting the tension of the drive belts · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 192
• Clutch maintenance · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 193
• Bleeding air from the hydraulic clutch circuit · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 193
• Maintenance of the gearbox, differential and rear reduction units · · · 194
• Transmission oil filter located on the inlet circuit · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 197

VII
 • Checking the oil level · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 199
• Changing the oil · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 200
• Maintenance of the rear axle · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 201
• Greasing · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 201
• Maintenance of the hydrostatic power steering · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 201
• Bleeding air from the hydraulic system · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 202
• Greasing the steering cylinders· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 202
• Front axle 2wd · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 203
• Axle oscillation bushings · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 203
• Hub reduction units · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 203
• Steering knuckle pins · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 203
• Steering cylinders · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 203
• Maintenance of the front driving axle · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 204
• Differential· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 204
• Hub reduction units · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 205
• Front axle oscillation bushings · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 206
• Checking operation of the differential lock controls · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 206
• Maintenance of the front and rear brakes· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 207
• Adjusting the parking brake· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 210
• Maintenance of the 3-point linkage· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 210
• Rear 3-point linkage · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 210
• Maintenance of the front P.T.O. · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 213
• Checking the oil level (see the figure on the next page) · · · · · · · · · 213
• Changing the oil · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 213
• Windscreen washer · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 215
• Windscreen and rear screen wipers · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 215
• Maintenance of the climate control system· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 216
• Tractors with standard cab roof· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 216
• Maintenance of the heating system · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 219
• Maintenance of the air conditioning system · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 220
• Air conditioning system compressor · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 221
• Service valves of the air conditioning system · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 221
• Tractors with high-visibility cab roof · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 222
• General cleaning of the tractor · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 223
• Cleaning with detergents· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 223
• Cleaning with compressed air · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 223

• SECTION 6 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 224

• Battery · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 224
• Fuse box · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 226
• Fuse box · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 227
• Symbols on the fuse box· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 228
• Cab fuse box· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 229
• Electric system diagram
• Electric system diagram - cab · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 233
• High-visibility cab · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 235
• Functional diagram of high-visibility roof electrical system · · · · · · · 236
• Lights · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 237
• Cleaning the headlights and sidelights · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 237
• Headlight alignment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 244
• Horizontal adjustment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 245
• Vertical adjustment · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 245

VIII
• SECTION 7 - STORAGE OF THE TRACTOR· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 246
• Operations prior to garaging the tractor for a long period· · · · · · · · · · 246
• Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of storage · · · · · · · · 247

• SECTION 8 - TECHNICAL DATA · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 248

• Technical specifications · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 248
• Engine · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 249
• 4WD axle · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 249
• Dimensions and weights 85HP · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 258
• Dimensions and weights 100HP · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 259
• Noise level perceived by the driver· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 260
• CPower take-off operating characteristics · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 261
• Ballast weights · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 263
• Attachment of implements to the tractor · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 263
• Speed tables· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 264
• IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT POINTS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 269

• SECTION 9 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 272

• Engine · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 272
• Gearbox · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 274
• Rear power take-off · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 275
• Front driving axle · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 275
• Brakes · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 276
• Hydraulic lift · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 276
• Auxiliary hydraulic systems · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 277
• Diagnostics socket · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 278

• NOTES · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 279

• APPENDIX · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A
• IMPORTANT! ADDITIONAL INFORMATION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A
• Combination of tractor and mounted implement · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · B
• Determination of the total weight, the axle loads, the tyre load carrying
capacity and the necessary minimum ballasting · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · B
• Consideration of rear mounted implement and front/rear combinations · C
• Front mounted implement · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · C

IX
 IMPORTANT

1 - DO NOT use the tractor before having read and understood this
manual in its entirety. The purchaser and user is in fact responsible for
reading this Use and Maintenance manual and for following the safety
precautions and the instructions for use and maintenance herein.

2 - Make sure that you are familiar with all the safety instructions on the
warning notices represented in this manual and on the tractor. If you do not
understand any of the instructions, contact your authorised dealer to
obtasin further clarification.

3 - If this tractor is to be lent or hired out to anyone, it is the owner’s

responsibility to ensure that any prospective users have read and fully
understood the Use and Maintenance manual before using the tractor,
and that they have received suitable instruction on the safe and correct
use of the vehicle.

4 - The operator is responsible for the daily inspection of the tractor and its
maintenance. He must make sure that any parts that could render
continued use of the tractor unsafe or cause excessive wear or damage of
other components are repaired or replaced. NEVER attempt to carry out
repairs or adjustments unless qualified to do so.

5 - When new parts are required, it is important that only genuine parts are
used.
Extensive damage may occur as a result of the fitment of parts of inferior
quality. Customer are advised that warranty expires immediately if not
genuine parts are used.

6 - These tractor are designed solely for use in customary agricultural

operations (intended use). Use in any other way is considered as contrary
to the intended use. The tractor maker accepts no liability for any damage
or injury resulting from misuse and these risks must be borne solely by the
user.

X
 NOTE
Since the production process may be modified subsequent to the printing
of this manual, the instructions, illustrations, specifications or other
information in this manual may not correspond exactly to your tractor.

In accordance with the Company’s policy of continuous improvement to its

tractors, alterations in the specifications of tractors may be made at any
time without notice.

To the owner of the new DEUTZ-FAHR tractor

Practical experience in the field is the key to the success of your new
DEUTZ-FAHR tractor, both as regards the design and the assembly. For
many years, DEUTZ-FAHR tractors have been used for the widest range
of applications in all possible conditions. However, even the best products
require care and maintenance.

To get the very best from your tractor, read this manual carefully before
undertaking any work or maintenance operations. Make sure you
understand all the safety notices affixed to the tractor or reported in this
manual. Keep this manual in a safe place where it is ready to hand for
consultation. Do not attempt to carry out any repairs or adjustments
unless competent to do so. Do not hesitate to contact your Dealer if you
require further information or assistance.

This manual has been prepared with the aim of helping the owner and/or
operator to carry out all the operations related to the use and maintenance
of the tractor.

XI
 IMPORTANT: THE SAFETY SEAL ON THE ENGINE GOVERNOR IS
APPLIED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND ENSURES THAT THE
POWER OUTPUT OF YOUR TRACTOR DOES NOT EXCEED THE
DECLARED AND APPROVED VALUE.ANY TAMPERING WITH THIS
SEAL ON THE GOVERNOR WILL VOID THE WARRANTY FOR THE
ENTIRE TRACTOR WITH IMMEDIATE EFFECT.

WARNING: IN SOME OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS USED IN THIS

OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK, PANEL OR GUARDS MAY HAVE
BEEN REMOVED FOR CLARITY. NEVER OPERATE THE TRACTOR
WITHOUT THESE COMPONENTS IN POSITION. IF THE REMOVAL OF
PANEL OR GUARDS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE A REPAIR, THEY
MUST BE REPLACED BEFORE OPERATION.

CE - This symbol certifies that the tractor has undergone and

passed the electromagnetic compatibility test.

WAR N I N G : D I E S E L E N G I N E E X H AU S T AN D S O M E OF I T S
CONSTITUENTS ARE KNOWN TO SOME STATES TO CAUSE
CANCER, BIRTH DEFECTS AND OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM.

XII
 WARNING: BATTERY POSTS, TERMINALS AND RELATED
AC C E S S O R I E S C O N TAI N L E AD AN D LE AD C O M P O U N D S ,
CHEMICALS KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE
CANCER AND BIRTH DEFECTS OR OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM.
WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.

WARNING: A NATURALLY ASPIRATED ENGINE, WHEN WORKING,

CAUSES RISK OF SPARKES. IT’S DANGEROUS ON ALL FOREST,
BRUSH OR AGRICULTURAL CROP COVERED LAND. KEEP IN MIND
T H AT Y OU R T R ACTOR I S NOT E QU I P P E D W I T H A R AT E D
QUALIFIED SPARK ARRESTER.

This manual is divided into nine main sections: safety, tractor identification
data, instructions for use, wheel and tyres, lubricants and routine
maintenance, electrical system, storage instructions, technical
specifications, fault diagnosis.
A table of contents appears in the previous pages.
There is an alphabetical index at the back of the manual.

References to the ‘left’, ‘right’, front or rear of the vehicle are in the sense of
a person in the driver’s seat facing forwards.

XIII
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

SECTION 1 - Safety

Safety Alert Symbol and Terms

This safety alert symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR
SAFETY IS INVOLVED!

The safety alert symbol identifies important safety messages on

tractors, safety signs, in manuals, or elsewhere.
When you see this symbol, be alert to the possibility of personal injury
or death.
Follow the instructions in the safety message.

Why is SAFETY important to you?

ACCIDENTS DISABLE and KILL
ACCIDENTS are COSTLY
ACCIDENTS can be AVOIDED

Tractor and Implement Safety

The tractor is a source of power - Mechanical and Hydraulic.
On its own, the tractor is of little practical value. Only when used in
conjunction with an implement or other attachment does it become a
working unit.
This instruction book is compiled to cover those safe working practices
that are associated with the base tractor operation.
It does not cover all operation and safety instructions relevant to all known
implements and attachments that may be fitted at the time of tractor
delivery or at some future date.
It is essential that operators use and understand the relevant instruction
manual of such implements and attachments.

XIV
SECTION I SAFETY

Introduction to Safety
This safety section of your Operator Instruction Book is intended to point
out some of the basic safety situations which may be encountered during
the normal operation and maintenance of your FOOTSTEP (ROPS) or
CAB tractor, and to suggest possible ways of dealing with these situations.
This section is NOT a replacement for other safety practices featured in
other sections of this book.
Additional precautions may be necessary, depending on attachments
used and conditions at the work site or in the service area. The tractor
maker has no direct control over tractor application, operation, inspection,
lubrication, or maintenance. Therefore it is YOUR responsibility to use
good safety practices in these areas.

Safety
The safety of the operator is one of the main concerns in designing and
developing a new tractor. Designers incorporate as many safety features
as is possible in constructing our tractors. However, every year many
accidents occur which could have been avoided by a few seconds thought
and a more careful approach to handling farm machinery and implements.
Read and practice the safety instructions detailed in the next pages of this
book.

A Word to the Operator

It is YOUR responsibility to read and understand the safety section in this
book before operating your tractor.
You must follow these safety instructions that take you step by step
through your working day.
Remember that YOU are the key to safety. Good safety practices not only
protect you, but also the people around you. Study the features in this
manual and make them a working part of your safety programme. Keep in
mind that this safety section is written only for this type of machine.
Practice all other usual and customary safe working precautions, and
above all - REMEMBER –SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. YOU
CAN PREVENT SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
Use only SAME DEUTZ-FAHR approved attachments and equipment.

Danger, Warning, Caution

Whenever you see the words and symbols shown below, used in this book
and on decals, you MUST take note of their instructions as they relate to
personal safety.

XV
SECTION I SAFETY

DANGER: This symbol together

with the word DANGER indicates
an imminently hazardous situation
DANGER that, if not avoided, will result in
DEAT H OR VERY SERIOUS
INJURY.
WARNING: This symbol together
with the word WARNING indicates
WARNING a potentially hazardous situation
that if not avoided could result in
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY.
CAUTION: This symbol together
with the word CAUTION is used to
CAUTION indicate a potentially hazardous si-
tuation that, if not avoided, may re-
sult in MINOR INJURY.
IMPORTANT: The word IMPORTANT is used to identify special instructions or
procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction
of the machine, process or its surroundings.
NOTE: The word NOTE is used to indicate points of particular interest for more effi-
cient and convenient repair or operation.

WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE OR OBSCURE DANGER, WARNING,

CAUTION OR INSTRUCTION DECALS. REPLACE ANY DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION OR INSTRUCTION DECALS THAT ARE NOT
READABLE OR ARE MISSING. REPLACEMENT DECALS ARE
AVAILABLE FROM YOUR DEALER IN THE EVENT OF LOSS OR
DAMAGE. THE ACTUAL LOCATION AND ORDERING CODE OF
THESE SAFETY DECALS IS ILLUSTRATED AT THE END OF THIS
SECTION. WHEN YOU REPLACE A PART THAT CARRIES A SAFETY
LABEL, MAKE SURE THAT THE SAME LABEL IS APPLIED TO THE
NEW PART. DO NOT USE FUEL OR SOLVENTS ETC. TO CLEAN
SAFETY LABELS. USE ACLEAN CLOTH DAMPED IN SOAPY WATER.

Decals
If a used tractor has been purchased, refer to the illustrations at the end of
this section to ensure that all the safety warning decals are in the correct
position and are readable.
WARNING: IN SOME OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS USED IN THIS
OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK, PANEL OR GUARDS MAY HAVE
BEEN REMOVED FOR CLARITY. NEVER OPERATE THE TRACTOR
WITHOUT THESE COMPONENTS IN POSITION. IF THE REMOVAL OF
PANEL OR GUARDS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE A REPAIR, THEY
MUST BE REPLACED BEFORE OPERATION.

XVI
SECTION I SAFETY

Follow a Safety Programme

For Safe Operation
For safe operation of an agricultural tractor, you must be a qualified and
authorized operator. To be qualified you must understand the written
instructions supplied in this Operator Instruction Book, have training, and
know the safety rules and regulations for the job.
Some regulations specify that no one under the age of 16 years, for
example, may operate power machinery. This includes tractors. It is your
responsibility to know what these regulations are, and obey them, in the
operating area or situation.
These will include, but are not limited to, the following instructions for safe
tractor operation.

WARNING: AN OPERATOR SHOULD NOT USE ALCOHOL OR DRUGS

WHICH CAN AFFECT HIS ALERTNESS OR CO-ORDINATION. AN
OPERATOR ON PRESCRIPTION OR ‘OVER THE COUNTER’ DRUGS
NEEDS MEDICAL ADVICE ON WHETHER OR NOT HE OR SHE CAN
SAFELY OPERATE tractors.

General safety rules

– DO NOT allow children or

unqualified persons to ope-
rate your tractor. Keep ot-
hers away from your area of
work.

– Securely fasten your seat

belt when the tractor has a
ROPS (Roll Over Protective
Structure) frame in the
upright position or is fitted
with a cab.

– Before starting the engine,

check that all the tractor
controls are in neutral posi-
tion. This is to prevent acci-
dental movement of the
vehicle or the starting of
tractor-driven implements.

– ONLY operate the controls

when seated in the driver’s
seat.

XVII
SECTION I SAFETY

– Always use the seat belt.

When used correctly, it can
help you drive in safety.
Ensure the belt is worn wit-
hout slack or twists, and that
is not caught on objects
near the seat or trapped un-
der the seat support.

– Before leaving the driving position, remember to lower the 3-point lin-
kage and/or any implement mounted on the tractor, to put all controls
in neutral, to apply the handbrake, to switch off the engine, to remove
the key from the ignition switch and to turn the battery earth switch to
“off” (where present).

– Where possible, avoid operating the tractor near ditches, emban-

kments and holes. Reduce speed when turning, crossing slopes, and
on rough, slippery, or muddy surfaces.

– Stay off slopes too steep for safe operation.

– Watch where you are going, especially at row ends, on roads, and aro-
und trees.

– DO NOT permit others to ride on the tractor or the implement unless

an approved passenger seat and seat belt is fitted.

– Hitch only to the drawbar and hitch points recommended, and never
above the centre line of the rear axle.

– Operate the tractor smoothly - no jerky turns, starts or stops. When the
tractor is stopped, apply the parking brake securely. Lower the imple-
ment and remove the key.

– DO NOT modify or remove any part of the equipment and DO NOT

use attachments unless they are properly matched to your tractor.

– For safety reasons, avoid very steep slopes. Change down through
the gears on both uphill and downhill slopes, especially with heavy lo-
ads. NEVER allow the tractor to freewheel with the clutch disengaged
or the gearbox in neutral.

XVIII
SECTION I SAFETY

– ALWAYS travel at a speed that allows full control and stability of the
tractor. Avoid working near embankments and ditches. Reduce speed
when turning or driving on steep gradients, and when travelling over
ground that is loose, slippy or covered in mud.

– DO NOT travel on the road or at high speed with the differential lock
engaged, as this could cause steering problems and thus lead to acci-
dents.

– Before starting the tractor or PTO driven implements, ALWAYS check

that no-one is within the tractor/implement operating area.

– Only attach to the 3-point linkage those implements specifically desi-

gned for the purpose. Do not use the 3-point linkage as a towing hook.
For towing, use the rear towing hitch only (the front hook is for use in
emergencies only).

– ALWAYS check that the weight of the towed vehicle or trailer is less
than the weight of the tractor (unless equipped with independent bra-
king). Braking distance will increase with speed and the weight towed,
particularly on downhill slopes.

– Lock the oscillating towing hitch in a fixed position and use the safety
locks when travelling on the public highway. Display load warning
signs when necessary and in accordance with the applicable regula-
tions. It is the responsibility of the operator to know and comply with
the requirements of the highway code.

– Use emergency lights when travelling on the public highway, both in

daytime and at night.Use direction indicators before any turning ma-
noeuvre.Ensure that all the lights on the tractor are kept clean.

– Use the bolt provided to lock the two brake pedals together when tra-
velling on the road. This is to ensure more uniform and more effective
braking.

– All machinery driven by the PTO is a potential cause of serious and

even fatal injury. Ensure that the PTO and drive shaft guards are al-
ways in place. Before starting any work in the vicinity of the PTO shaft,
and before servicing/cleaning PTO-driven implements, put the PTO
control in the disengaged position, stop the tractor engine and wait un-
til all the moving parts of the implement have come to a complete
standstill.

XIX
SECTION I SAFETY

– Alighting from the driving position when the engine is running, altho-
ugh permitted in emergencies, creates a hazardous situation for
which additional precautions must be taken as regards the tractor and
any implements connected to it. In any case, before leaving the driving
position, make sure that all the safety devices are in place, that no-one
is in the vicinity of the tractor, that the tractor is parked on a level surfa-
ce, that the handbrake is applied and that all the drive control levers
are in neutral position. While alighting from the tractor, keep well clear
of any moving parts.

– NEVER operate the tractor

inside a building with the do-
ors closed. It is essential to
ensure that the area is suffi-
ciently ventilated.

– Fluids under pressure can

c a u s e s e v e r e in j u r y.
NEVER use your hands to
trace an oil or fuel leak. Use
instead a piece of wood or
cardboard for this purpose.
Before disconnecting any
part of a normally pressuri-
sed circuit, always make
sure that the circuit is fully
depressurised. If engine oil,
hydraulic fluid or any fluid
from a pressurised circuit
penetrates your skin, seek
medical a s s i s ta n c e
IMMEDIATELY.

– DO NOT use explosive et-

her based products to facili-
tate cold starting. Follow the
instructions given in this
manual in the section “Cold
starting”.

– Incorrect connection of the battery terminals or between the battery

and a battery charger could damage the electrical system or even ca-
use the battery to explode. NEVER connect the battery terminals to-
gether. The acid electrolyte contained in the battery is highly corrosive
and can cause burns or even blindness if it enters the eyes. When fil-
ling/topping up a battery with electrolyte, NEVER smoke or allow a na-
ked flame in the vicinity and always wear safety goggles.

XX
SECTION I SAFETY

– DO NOT use elastic mate-

rials to pull the tractor, as a
sudden release of energy
stored in the material could
cause a fatal accident.

– NEVER attempt to weld or

repair a wheel or wheel rim
when fitted with an inflated
tyre.

– A runaway tractor can cau-

se serious or fatal injury.
Only start the engine when
seated in the driving posi-
tion and after checking that
all the drive controls are in
neutral. NEVER start the
engine from the ground or
by bypassing the electrical
safety system. If the starter
motor fails to operate when
all the controls are in neutral
p o s i t i o n , c o n ta c t yo u r
nearest Assistance Service
centre.

– NEVER refuel the tractor

when the engine is running
or even hot. DO NOT smoke
when refueling. DO NOT fill
the fuel tank right to the
brim, but leave a little space
to allow for expansion of the
fuel. Refuel in a safe place,
away from naked flames or
sparks.

– NEVER allow anyone to

stand between the tractor
and the implement during
hitching operations.

– NEVER wear headphones or earphones to listen to the radio or music

while driving. This reduces your ability to concentrate and to hear so-
unds essential to safe driving.

XXI
SECTION I SAFETY

– Avoid contact with pesticides. Tractor cabs, when fitted, do NOT pro-
tect you against inhaling dangerous pesticides. Meticulously follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for using and handling pesticides.
Always wear the required personal protective equipment (respirator,
face mask, etc.) even in the cab.

– Certain tractor models are

equipped with speed mea-
surement radar. Even tho-
ugh these radar systems
emit only low intensity radio RA
waves, NEVER look directly DA
R

at the device when it is

operating.

– Periodically check the wheel nuts and tighten them to the specified
torque. (See the Maintenance section for wheel nut torque values).

– The best way to transport a tractor that has broken down is to tow it
away on a flat bed truck. Always secure the tractor to the truck with
chains before driving off. If you must tow a tractor, do not exceed 10
km/h, and always have an operator at the tractor’s controls to steer
and brake as necessary. If necessary, ask your dealer if the model of
tractor you have can be towed or not.

– Do not weld or heat any painted parts. Toxic fumes could be given off.
Remove paint by abrasion first, before heating the part. Always per-
form these operations in a well ventilated area.

– Keep heat well away from

pipes and hoses containing
pressurised fluids. Heating
pressurised pipes and ho-
ses can cause inflammable
fluids to spray out and cau-
se serious burns to you and
others nearby.

XXII
SECTION I SAFETY

Protective Structures
Roll Over Protective Structures
A Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS) and seat belt is fitted as standard
equipment to the footstep tractor at the time of factory assembly. If the
ROPS was removed by the original purchaser or has been removed, it is
recommended that you equip your tractor with a Roll Over Protective
Structure and a seat belt. ROPS are effective in reducing injuries during
overturn accidents.

Overturning a tractor without

ROPS can result in serious
injury or death.
If a fold down ROPS is installed
DO NOT wear seat belt when
the ROPS is in the folded down
position.

Operation
– Before using the tractor ensure that the ROPS frame is not damaged,
that it is securely fastened to the tractor and if a hinged section is fitted
that it is in the raised position and secured.

– If the ROPS has been removed from the tractor, or folded down for a
specific operation, it must be refitted or erected immediately after-
wards using the proper hardware and applying the recommended
torque values.

– DO NOT attach chains, ropes, or cables to the ROPS for pulling pur-
poses; this will cause the tractor to tip backwards. Always pull from the
tractor drawbar.

– Always wear your seat belt - adjusted snugly except when operating
with a folded down ROPS.

– Check the seat belt for damage. A damaged seat belt must be repla-
ced.

XXIII
SECTION I SAFETY

Damage to the ROPS

If the tractor has rolled over or the ROPS has been damaged (such as
striking an overhead object during transport), the ROPS must be replaced
to provide the original degree of protection.
After an accident, check for damage to the ROPS, operator’s seat, seat
belt and seat belt mountings.
Before you operate the tractor, replace all damaged parts.

DO NOT WELD, DRILL, BEND OR STRAIGHTEN THE ROPS.

To do so reduces the protection it offer

Cab
The safety cab has been designed for fitment to this series of tractor and
meets all the legal requirements of cab safety and noise levels.

The safety cab conforms to the various international safety standards. The
cab must NEVER be drilled, or modified to install accessories or
implements . Welding components to the cab or repairing damaged
components is NOT PERMITTED. DO NOT attach chains or ropes to the
main frame of the cab for pulling purposes.

If additional controls or displays are to be added to the operator’s area

contact your Dealer for information as to how this can best be done.
The ROPS cab together with the seat belt is effective in reducing injuries
during overturn accidents. Wearing the seat belt is an important part of this
protection.

– Always wear your seat belt-adjusted snugly.

– Check the seat belt for damage. A damaged seat belt must be repla-
ced.

WARNING: IF THE TRACTOR HAS TO OPERATE IN AREAS WITH

RISK OF FALLING OBJECTS (LIKE IN MINES, ETC.), WHERE A FOPS
IS REQUIRED, PLEASE CONSIDER THAT YOUR TRACTOR,
EQUIPPED WITH ROPS SAFETY STRUCTURE (FRAME OR CAB), IS
NOT ALLOWED TO OPERATE IN THOSE AREAS.

XXIV
SECTION I SAFETY

Prepare for Safe Operation

Protect Yourself
Wear all the protective clothing and personal safety devices issued to you
or called for by job conditions. Don’t take chances.

You may need:

• A hard hat.
• Safety glasses, goggles, or face
shield.
• Hearing protection.
• Respirator or filter mask.
• Foul weather clothing.
• Reflective clothing.
• Heavy gloves (neoprene for
chemicals, leather for rough
work).
• Safety boots.

Note where fire extinguishers and

first-aid or emergency equipment is BASIC
FIRST
AID
kept and get to know where to find help
in a hurry. Make sure you know how to
use this equipment.

DO NOT wear loose clothing, jewellery or other items and tie up long hair
which could entangle in controls or other parts of the tractor.

Risks from exposure to noise

The tractor and any implements attached to it constitute a source of noise
of which the intensity and frequency can be measured using the
appropriate instruments.
Anyone who uses the tractor must know that:
– exposure to excessive and/or prolonged noise can cause serious da-
mage, not just to the hearing but also to general health. The higher the
noise level (dbA) and the greater the duration of exposure, the higher
the risk. The combination of both these factors can be expressed in
the value LEP (level of personal exposure to noise).
– you therefore need to know the noise level generated by the tractor.
This information can be found in the Use and Maintenance Handbook,
under the chapter heading “Technical Data”.

XXV
SECTION I SAFETY

– the use of ear protection is essential when the noise level exceeds a
certain value and/or when operating the tractor for prolonged periods.
The point at which action is to be taken is generally when the level of
personal exposure LEP reaches or exceeds 85 dbA. Various types of
protection are available, including ear muffs, ear plugs and helmets.

Know Your Equipment

Know your tractor. Know how to
operate all equipment on your machine
and the implements and attachments
used with it. Know the purpose of all
the controls, gauges and dials. Know
the rated load capacity, speed range,
braking and steering characteristics,
turning
radius, and operating clearances.
Keep in mind that rain, snow, ice, loose
gravel, soft ground, etc. can change
the way your tractor operates.

Under poor conditions, slow down and be extra careful, engage

four-wheel drive, if fitted.

Study the DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION safety signs on your tractor

and the information signs also.

READ THIS OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK BEFORE STARTING

THE ENGINE.
STUDY IT BEFORE YOU START WORK.
IF T H E R E IS SO M E T H IN G IN T H E MA N U A L YO U D O N ’ T
UNDERSTAND, ASK SOMEONE (such as your equipment Dealer) TO
EXPLAIN IT TO YOU.

IMPORTANT: This manual covers general safe practices for agricultural

tractors. It must always be kept with the tractor. For further copies contact
your Dealer.

Use all Available Protective and Safety Devices

Keep all protective devices in place and securely fastened. Make certain
all guards, shields and safety signs are properly installed, as specified,
and are in good condition.

XXVI
SECTION I SAFETY

To help keep you and others around you safe, your tractor must be
equipped with:
– Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS), and seat belt.
– Tractor P.T.O. shield.
Your tractor may also need:
– Rear view mirror.
– Fire extinguisher.
– ROPS, FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure), protective enclo-
sure or protective screens. Remember FOPS are protection from light
falling objects and are not intended as protection from large falling ob-
jects such as large round bales or fence rails.

– SMV (slow moving vehicle) emblem, additional safety guards, lights

or decals and a back up alarm.

Know which devices are required for safe operation of your tractor. Use
them. Make sure they are in place and in good condition. DO NOT remove
or disconnect any safety device.

Check the Equipment

Before you begin your working day, take time to check your tractor and
ensure that all systems are in good operational condition.
– DO NOT smoke while refu-
elling the tractor. Keep any
type of open flame away.

– Stop the engine and wait for

it to cool before refuelling.

– Check for loose, broken,

missing, or damaged parts.

– Have everything put into

good repair. Make certain all
safety devices are in place.

– Check ROPS and seat belt for damage. A damaged ROPS or seat belt
MUST be replaced.

– Ensure that implements and attachments are properly installed and

that the tractor and implement P.T.O. rev/min ratings match.

XXVII
SECTION I SAFETY

– Check the tyres for cuts, bulges and correct pressure. Replace worn
or damaged tyres.

– Check the engine oil level and add oil if required.

– Perform all maintenance procedures outlined in the maintenance and

adjustment section of this manual.

– Check foot and parking brakes for proper operation, adjust if neces-
sary.

– Check that the P.T.O. driveline locking devices are latched.

– Check that the tractor P.T.O. shield and driveline guards are in place
and operating properly.

– Check the tractor and imple-

ment hydraulic system.
Have any leaks or damaged
parts repaired or replaced.

WARNING: DIESEL FUEL OR HYDRAULIC FLUID UNDER PRESSURE

CAN PENETRATE THE SKIN OR EYES AND CAUSE SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY, BLINDNESS OR DEATH. FLUID LEAKS, UNDER
PRESSURE, MAY NOT BE VISIBLE. USE A PIECE OF CARDBOARD
OR WOOD TO FIND LEAKS. DO NOT USE YOUR BARE HAND. WEAR
SAFETY GOGGLES FOR EYE PROTECTION. IF ANY FLUID IS
INJECTED INTO THE SKIN, IT MUST BE SURGICALLY REMOVED
WITHIN A FEW HOURS BY A DOCTOR FAMILIAR WITH THIS TYPE OF
INJURY.

XXVIII
SECTION I SAFETY

Before applying pressure to the fuel or hydraulic system, be sure all

connections are tight and that lines, pipes, and hoses are not damaged.
Before disconnecting fuel or hydraulic lines, be sure to relieve all
pressure.

WARNING: LIQUID COOLING SYSTEMS BUILD UP PRESSURE AS

THE ENGINE GETS HOT. BEFORE REMOVING THE RADIATOR CAP,
STOP THE ENGINE AND LET THE SYSTEM COOL.
CHECK THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM AND ADD COOLANT AS
REQUIRED.

Make sure that all hydraulic lines are correctly installed and not crossed.

Clean the Tractor

– Keep work surfaces and engine compartments clean.

– Before cleaning the machine, always lower implements to the ground,

place transmission in neutral or with the lowest gear engaged, if me-
chanical, engage the parking brake, shut off the engine and remove
the key.

– Clean steps, pedals and floor. Remove grease or oil. Brush away dust
or mud. In winter, scrape away snow and ice. Remember - slippery
surfaces are dangerous.

– Remove or put away tools, buckets, chains and hooks.

Protect the Environment

It is illegal to pollute drains,

w a te r c o u r s e s o r s o il. U s e
authorised waste disposal
facilities, including civic amenity
sites and garages providing
facilities for disposal of used oil.
If in doubt, contact your local
authority for advice.

XXIX
SECTION I SAFETY

Servicing the Tractor

– DO NOT service the tractor
while the engine is running
or hot, or if the tractor is in
motion.

– Before making adjustments

to, or servicing the electrical
system, disconnect the bat-
tery negative (-) cable first.

– To prevent fires or explo-

sions keep open flame
away from the battery or
cold weather starting aids.
To prevent sparks which co-
uld cause explosions use
jump cables according to
instructions.

– When making repairs or adjustments it is recommended that you con-

sult your Dealer, and have the work carried out by trained personnel.

– The implement and/or tractor must be supported on suitable wooden

blocks or stands, NOT a hydraulic jack.

– Check all nuts and bolts periodically for tightness, especially wheel
hub and rim nuts. Tighten to the prescribed torque values.

– Check the brakes regularly, top up the reservoir and/or adjust where
necessary. Make sure that the brakes are evenly adjusted, especially
when using a trailer.

Starting
Warn Personnel before Starting
Before starting, walk completely around the tractor and any attached
equipment. Make sure that no one is under it, on it, or close to it. Let other
workers and bystanders know you are starting up and don’t start until
everyone is clear of the tractor, implements and towed equipment.
Ensure that all bystanders, particularly children, are a suitable distance
away before starting the engine.

XXX
SECTION I SAFETY

Mount and Dismount Safely

Always use ‘three point contact’ with the machine, and face the machine
when you mount it. (Three point contact means both hands and one foot or
one hand and both feet are in contact with the machine at all times during
mounting and dismounting).

Clean your shoes and wipe your hands before climbing on. Use handrails,
grab handles, ladders or steps (as provided) when mounting or
dismounting.

DO NOT use control levers as a

hand hold and never step on
foot controls when mounting or
dismounting.

DO NOT attempt to mount or

dismount from a moving tractor.
DO NOT jump off a tractor other
than in an emergency.

Start Safely

WARNING: BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE MAKE SURE THERE IS

PLENTY OF VENTILATION. DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE IN A
C L O S E D B U I L D I N G. T H E E X H AUS T F U M E S M AY C AU S E
ASPHYXIATION.

Always start the engine from the operator’s seat with all the transmission
levers and the P.T.O. lever in neutral.
Make sure that the tractor’s dual
brake pedals are locked
together at all times unless you
are making turns in the field
which require independent use
of the brakes. Make sure the
brakes are properly adjusted so
that both brakes engage at the
same time.
Adjust the seat, fasten the seat
belt, apply the parking brake
and put all controls in neutral
before starting up.

XXXI
SECTION I SAFETY

DANGER: START THE ENGINE, WITH THE STARTER KEY, FROM THE
OPERATOR’S SEAT ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE
ENGINE BY SHORTING ACROSS THE STARTER TERMINALS. THE
MACHINE WILL START IN GEAR IF THE NEUTRAL START CIRCUIT IS
BYPASSED. THIS COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
ANYONE IN THE VICINITY OF THE TRACTOR. ENSURE THAT THE
ENGINE STARTER SOLENOID COVER IS ALWAYS IN POSITON.

Follow Recommended Starting Procedures

Follow the starting procedures recommended in the Operation section of
this Operator Instruction Book. This includes normal starting, cold starting,
and the use of starting fluids.

Test the Controls

After starting, re-check all gauges and lights. Make sure everything is
functioning correctly. If the tractor does not respond correctly when each
control is operated, DO NOT use the machine until the fault is rectified.

Starting Fluid

DANGER: DO NOT USE AEROSOL CANS OF STARTING AID ON

TRACTORS WITH THE THERMOSTART CONNECTED TO THE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. ETHER COMBINED WITH THERMOSTART
CAN CAUS E AN E X P LOS ION W ITH DAM AGE TO E NGINE ,
PERSONAL INJURY, OR BOTH.

Your tractor has been fitted with

a thermostart cold starting
device. If aerosol cans of
starting fluid, or ether start-aid,
are to be used the thermostart
must be disconnected. Remove
the wire from the thermostart STARTI NG
unit which will be found on the FLUI D
induction manifold. Tape the
end of the wire to prevent an
electrical short circuit.

XXXII
SECTION I SAFETY

Handle starting fluid as directed

by the manufacturer. Starting
fluid must only be used when an
ether-start aid is fitted as original
equipment by the manufacturer
or when installed by a Dealer as
a n a c c e s s o r y. In c a s e s o f
tractors being fitted with glow
plugs or thermostart, these must
b e r e m o ve d p r i o r t o t h e
installation of an ether start-aid.

Work Safely

WARNING: AN UNBALANCED TRACTOR COULD OVERTURN AND

C AU S E I N JU RY OR D E AT H . M AK E S U R E F R O N T FR AM E
COUNTERWEIGHTS, WHEEL WEIGHTS AND WHEEL BALLAST ARE
USED AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DO NOT ADD
EXTRA COUNTERWEIGHTS TO COMPENSATE FOR AN
OVERLOADED TRACTOR, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO REDUCE THE
LOAD. KEEP ALL PARTS OF YOUR BODY INSIDE THE OPERATOR’S
COMPARTMENT WHILE OPERATING THE TRACTOR.

Making the Right Moves

Make sure your tractor is ready for the job it must do.
Know the rated load capacities of your tractor and never exceed them. Be
certain that any equipment or implements you intend to use DO NOT
exceed the load rating of your tractor. Be sure the tractor and implement
PTO speed match.

Keep in mind that tractors normally operate on uneven, unpaved, and

often bumpy or sloping surfaces. Operating conditions can reduce the
amount of weight you should carry or pull.

Follow Safe Operating Practices

– Operate the controls smoothly - don’t jerk the steering wheel or other
controls.

– DO NOT get on or off a moving tractor. Keep a firm grip on the steering
wheel at all times, with the thumbs clear of the spokes when driving
the tractor

XXXIII
SECTION I SAFETY

– Make sure you have adequate clearance in all directions for tractor,
cab, ROPS and implement.

– DO NOT play games with a tractor or equipment.Use only for intended

purpose.

– DO NOT attempt to work the controls except from the operator’s , if

tractor is NOT equipped with proper passenger seat.

– DO NOT carry passengers, if tractor is NOT equipped with proper

passenger seat.

– Before dismounting, always disengage the P.T.O., lower all attac-

hments and implements to the ground, engage parking brake, shut off
the engine, engage the lowest gear (if mechanical transmission) and
remove the key. With hydraulic transmission or powershift transmis-
sion or powershuttle, ALWAYS chock the tractor wheels.

DO NOT touch, lean on, or

reach through any implement
mechanism or permit others to
do so.
Stay alert. Should something
break, come loose, or fail to
operate on your equipment,
stop work, lower equipment to
the ground, shut off the engine,
inspect the machine and have
repairs or adjustments made
before resuming operation.

Watch out for Others

– Be aware of what is going

on. DO NOT allow an untrai-
ned or unqualified person to
operate your tractor. They
could injure themselves or
someone else.

XXXIV
SECTION I SAFETY

WARNING: YOUR TRACTOR IS A ONE-PERSON MACHINE. DO NOT

PERMIT OTHERS TO RIDE ON THE TRACTOR OR THE IMPLEMENT.
IN SOME TERRITORIES A PASSENGER SEAT MUST BE FITTED TO
CARRY PASSENGERS. DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO RIDE ON THE
IMPLEMENTS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT INCLUDING TRAILERS,
EXCEPT ON CERTAIN HARVESTING EQUIPMENT, SPECIFICALLY
D E S I G N E D F O R R I D E R S D U R I N G T H E AC T U AL H ARV E S T
OPERATION ONLY (NOT DURING TRANSPORT). SUCH EQUIPMENT
MUST HAVE PROVISION FOR A SAFE RIDING AREA. DO NOT
ALLOW CHILDREN ON THE TRACTOR.

– Be certain you can control both speed and direction before moving.
Move slowly until you are sure that everything is operating properly.
After starting, recheck the steering, right and left. Be certain you have
full steering and brake control. If differential is locked, DO NOT opera-
te at high speed or turn the tractor until the differential lock is
disengaged.

– DO NOT lift a load over anyone.

– Keep others away from your operation. DO NOT allow anyone to

stand or pass under a raised implement.

– DO NOT lift objects that can not be contained in the bucket, get the ap-
propriate attachment. DO NOT allow anyone to stand on the ROPS or
fenders.

– When using a loader, avoid sudden stops, starts, turns, or change of

direction. Keep loads close to the ground when transporting.

– DO NOT stand (or allow anyone else to stand) in front of, under, or be-
hind loaded or loading equipment. DO NOT drive a tractor up to some-
one standing in front of a fixed object.

– Keep others away from universal joints, hitches, drawbar, lift arms,
P.T.O. drives, cylinders, belts, pulleys, and other moving parts. Keep
all shields and guards in place.

WARNING: DO NOT STAND, OR ALLOW ANYONE ELSE TO STAND,

BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT UNLESS THE ENGINE
IS TURNED OFF AND THE PARKING BRAKE IS ENGAGED, THE
LOWEST GEAR IS ENGAGED, THE KEY IS REMOVED, AND ALL
ATTAC H M E N T S OR I M P L E M E N T S ARE LOW E R E D TO T H E
GROUND.

XXXV
SECTION I SAFETY

Risk of Overturning
For your safety, it is strongly
recommended that all footstep
tractors are fitted with Roll Over
Protective Structures (ROPS)
and seat belts.
In the event of an overturn with a
tractor fitted with a cab or ROPS,
hold the steering wheel firmly
and DO NOT attempt to leave
the seat until the tractor has
come to rest. If the doors of the
cab are obstructed, leave
through the rear window or the
roof hatch.

To Avoid Side Overturns

– Set the wheel track at the widest setting suitable for the job being
done.

– Lock the brake pedals together before driving at transport speeds.

– Reduce speed to match operating conditions. If the tractor is equip-

ped with a front-end loader, carry the bucket and load as low as
possible.

– Make wide slow turns at reduced speed. Don’t let your tractor bounce.
You may lose steering control.

– Don’t pull a load too heavy for your tractor. It could run away on the
down slope or the tractor could jack-knife around a towed load.

– Don’t brake suddenly. Apply brakes smoothly and gradually.

– When going down a slope, use the throttle to slow the tractor engine
and use the same gear range you would use to go up the slope. Shift
into gear before you start downhill.

– Engage four-wheel drive (if fitted).

– It is less likely that the tractor will overturn if you travel straight up or
down a steep slope rather than across it.

XXXVI
SECTION I SAFETY

– Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you must do so, avoid any
holes or depressions on the downhill side. Avoid any stumps, rocks,
bumps or raised areas on the uphill side. When operating near ditches
and banks, always keep your tractor behind the shear line. Avoid dit-
ches, embankments and river-banks which might cave in.

– If it is necessary to cross a steep slope, avoid turning uphill, slow down

and make a wide turn. Travel directly up or down the slope, never
across it. When travelling up or down a slope, keep the heavy end of
the tractor on the uphill side.

– If when travelling across a slope with side mounted implements, keep

the implement on the uphill side.Do not raise the implements. Keep
them as low to the ground as possible when crossing a slope.

– When towing a load at transport speed or in the field, lock the drawbar
in the centre position and use a safety chain.

WARNING: DO NOT DISENGAGE THE CLUTCH OR ATTEMPT TO

SHIFT GEAR AFTER YOU HAVE STARTED DOWNHILL.

– DO NOT use your tractor to round up farm animals.

WARNING: HITCHING TO THE REAR AXLE, OR ANY OTHER POINT

ABO V E TH E S W I N G I N G D R AW B AR, CAN C AU S E A R E AR
OVERTURN.

To Avoid Rear Overturns

– DO NOT pull anything using the top link connection, or from any point
above the centre line of the rear axle. Always use an approved draw-
bar, and only use a drawbar pin that locks in place.

– High hitching can cause rear overturn, which may cause serious injury
or death. Hitch loads to the drawbar only.

– Only use a three-point linkage drawbar when stays are fitted to keep it
in the down position.

– Use front counterweights to increase tractor stability when towing a

heavy load or to counter balance a heavy rear mounted implement.

XXXVII
SECTION I SAFETY

– Start forward slowly and gradually increase your speed. DO NOT rev
the engine or drop the clutch. If the tractor is attached to a heavy load,
or immovable object, improper clutching may cause overturn.

– If the front end of the tractor starts to lift, reduce your speed and, if ne-
cessary, disengage the clutch.

– If your tractor is bogged down in mud or frozen to the ground, DO NOT

attempt to drive forwards. The tractor can rotate around its rear whe-
els and overturn. Lift any attached implement and attempt to BACK
OUT. If this is not possible, tow it out with another vehicle.

– If you get stuck in a ditch, BACK OUT, if possible. If you must go for-
ward, do it slowly and carefully.

– A bare tractor or tractor with rear mounted attachments should be bac-

ked up the slope in reverse and travel forward downhill.

– A tractor with a loaded front-end bucket should be backed down the

slope and travel forward uphill.Keep the loader bucket as low as
possible.

– Always keep the tractor in gear when going downhill. DO NOT permit
the tractor to coast with clutch disengaged or transmission in neutral.

General Operating Hazards

DANGER: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO UNPLUG THE HYDRAULIC

CONNECTIONS, OR ADJUST AN IMPLEMENT WITH THE ENGINE
RUNNING OR THE P.T.O. DRIVE IN OPERATION. TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN VERY SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

– Ensure that the P.T.O. shield is in place and that the P.T.O. cap is fitted
when the P.T.O. driveline is not in use.

– Before attaching, detaching, cleaning or adjusting P.T.O. driven imple-

ments, disengage the P.T.O., stop the engine, remove the key, and
make sure that the P.T.O. driveline has stopped.

– Ensure that all the P.T.O. driveline guards are in place and observe all
safety decals.

– Be sure everyone is clear of your machine before engaging the P.T.O..

For stationary P.T.O. operation, always place transmission in neutral,
engage parking brake, and chock both tractor and implement wheels.

XXXVIII
SECTION I SAFETY

– When operating mobile P.T.O. driven equipment, DO NOT leave the

tractor seat until the PTO drive is disengaged, the lowest gear is enga-
ged (if mechanical), the parking brake is engaged, the engine shut off
and the key removed.

– DO NOT use P.T.O. adaptors, reducers or extensions as they extend

the P.T.O. coupler and universal joint out beyond the protection offe-
red by the P.T.O. shield.

– The top link and lift rods must not be extended beyond the point where
threads begin to show.

– When using chemicals, carefully follow for use, storage and disposal.
Also follow the chemical application equipment manufacturer’s
instructions.

– When operating under poor visibility conditions, or in the dark, use

your tractor field lights and reduce your ground speed. DO NOT use
your field lights when travelling on a roadway because rear pointed
white lights may be illegal except when reversing and may confuse
following drivers.

– Operate your tractor with the wheels set at the widest setting possible,
consistent with the particular task you are performing. To adjust wheel
settings refer to Maintenance and Adjustment section.

– Reduce your speed when operating over rough or slippery ground

and when foliage restricts your view of hazards.

– DO NOT make sharp turns at high speed.

WARNING: A FRONT-END LOADER (BUCKET OR FORKS) MUST BE

EQUIPPED WITH A SUITABLE RESTRAINING DEVICE TO PREVENT
THE LOAD (BALES, FENCE POSTS, ROLLS OF FENCE, WIRE ETC.)
FROM ROLLING DOWN THE LIFT ARMS INTO THE OPERATOR’S
COMPARTMENT AND CRUSHING THE DRIVER WHEN THE LOADER
IS RAISED. INADEQUATELY SECURED OBJECTS COULD ALSO
FALL AND INJURE BYSTANDERS.

Implements and Attachments

– Three-point hitch and side mounted implements make a much larger
arc when turning than towed equipment. Make certain to allow suffi-
cient clearance for turning. Use only approved attachments and
implements.

XXXIX
SECTION I SAFETY

– DO NOT overload an attachment or towed equipment. Use proper co-

unter-weights to maintain tractor stability. Hitch loads to the drawbar
only.

– A safety chain will help control drawn equipment should it be acciden-

tally separated from the drawbar while transporting. Using the appro-
priate adaptor parts, attach the chain to the tractor drawbar support or
other specified anchor location. Provide only enough slack in the cha-
in to permit turning. See your Dealer for a chain with a strength rating
equal to, or greater than the gross weight of the towed machine.

– Make sure any towed implements are equipped with a safety chain lin-
king tractor and implement.

– Pull only from the approved drawbar. Towing or attaching to other lo-
cations may cause the tractor to overturn.

WARNING: TRACTOR REQUIRES CORRECT TRAILER BRAKING

E Q U I P M E N T B E I N S TAL L E D AN D C O N N E C T E D TO T H E
EQUIPMENT.

Safety - Towing
– For towed equipment WITHOUT brakes, DO NOT tow equipment:
- at speeds over 30 km/h (19 miles/h);
- that, when fully loaded, weighs more than 1 times the weight of the
towing unit (please refer to local rules).

– For towed equipment WITH MECHANICAL brakes, DO NOT tow

equipment:
- at speeds over 30 km/h (19 miles/h);
- that, when fully loaded, weighs more than 1 times the weight of the
towing unit or 5000 Kg (please refer to local rules).
– For towed equipment WITH HYDRAULIC OR PNEUMATIC brakes,
DO NOT tow equipment:
- at speeds over 40 km/h (25 miles/h);
- that, when fully loaded, weighs more than 4 times the weight of the
towing unit, with a maximum of 20000 Kg (please refer to local rules).
– When parking tractor and towed trailer, engage the lowest transmis-
sion gear, engage parking brake, shut off the engine, remove the key
and chock both tractor and trailer wheels
– Stopping distance increases with speed and weight of towed loads,
and on hills and slopes. Towed loads with or without brakes that are
too heavy for the tractor or are towed too fast can cause loss of con-
trol. Consider the total weight of the equipment and its load.

XL
SECTION I SAFETY

WARNING: ON TOWING TRAILERS, BEFORE LEAVING THE DRIVING

POSITION, REMEMBER TO PUT ALL CONTROLS IN NEUTRAL, TO
APPLY THE HANDBRAKE, TO SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE, TO
ENGAGE THE LOWEST GEAR (IF MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION)
AND TO REMOVE THE KEY. WITH HYDRAULIC TRANSMISSION OR
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION OR POWERSHUTTLE, ALWAYS
CHOCK BOTH TRACTOR AND TRAILER WHEELS.

Road Transport
BEFORE operating your tractor on a public road, a number of precautions
must be taken.

– Familiarise yourself with - and obey - all laws appropriate to your trac-
tor.
– Lock your brake pedals together.
– Raise all implements to their transport position and lock them in place.
– Place all implements into their narrowest transport configuration.
– Disengage the P.T.O. and differential lock.
– Make sure any required clearance flags or hazard lights are in place
and in working order.
– Make sure you use a proper hitch pin with a clip retainer.
– Clean off all reflectors and road lights, front and rear, and be certain
they are in working order.
– Make sure tractor and equipment are equipped with Slow Moving Ve-
hicle (SMV) signs and other marking aids recommended for improved
visibility, or beacon if the law requires them.

WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW ANY PASSENGERS ON THE TRACTOR

OR TOWED EQUIPMENT.

Rules of the Road

WHEN operating your tractor on a public road a number of precautions
must be taken.

– Know the route you are going to travel.

– Use flashing lights or beacon when travelling on roads, day or night,

unless prohibited by law.

– Use caution when towing a load at transport speeds especially if the

towed equipment is NOT equipped with brakes.

XLI
SECTION I SAFETY

– Observe all local or national regulations regarding the road speed of

your tractor.

– Observe all local or national regulations regarding the max towed

weight.

– Use extreme caution when transporting on snow-covered or slippery

roads.

– Wait for traffic to clear before entering a public road.

– Beware of blind intersections. Slow down until you have a clear view.

– DO NOT attempt to pass at any intersection.

– Slow down for turns and curves.

– Make wide, gentle turns.

– Signal your intent to slow, stop or turn.

– Shift to a lower gear before going up or down hills.

– Keep tractor in gear. DO NOT coast with the clutch disengaged or

transmission in neutral.

– Stay out of the path of oncoming traffic.

– Drive in your correct lane keeping as near to the kerb as possible.

– If traffic builds up behind you, pull off the road and let it go by.

– Drive defensively. Anticipate what other drivers might do.

– When towing a load, start braking sooner than normal and slow down
gradually.

– Watch out for overhead obstructions.

– Make sure that the load does not obscure warning or any other lights.

XLII
SECTION I SAFETY

After Operation

When stopping at any time, bring the tractor to a complete halt, apply the
parking brake, disengage the P.T.O., place the lowest gear engaged,
lower the implement to the ground, stop the engine and remove the key
BEFORE leaving the seat.

Welding work on the tractor body

Before performing electrical welding work on the tractor body or on
attached implements, always disconnect the electrical wiring of the
generator, the battery and the electronic boxes.

Welding work on the cab posts is not permitted.

Watch out that plastic components, such as air compressor system or

hydraulic hoses, are not overheated.

XLIII
SECTION I SAFETY

Safety instructions for the installation of supplementary equipment

and/or electronic components.

The tractor is equipped with electronic control devices. The operation of

other electronic devices can create electromagnetic fields, which may
cause malfunctions in the tractor’s electronics. To prevent the risk of injury
deriving from such malfunctions, observe the following safety instructions.

When installing supplementary equipment and/or electrical and electronic

components on the tractor which require connection to the tractor’s
electrical system, it is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the
installation does not cause malfunction of the tractor’s electronics or other
components. This applies mainly to the following devices:

Radio
CB radio receiver
Mobile telephone (ETACS, GSM, etc.)

In particular, it is important to check that any supplementary electrical or

electronic devices installed comply with the current EMC directives
89/336/EEC and that they bear the CE marking.

For the installation of mobile communication systems (e.g. radio

transmitter/receivers, telephone), it is important to observe the following
additional instructions:

Ensure that you have a licence to operate the device (e.g.: BZT licence in
Germany).

Ensure that the device/s are firmly fixed.

The use of mobile radio and telephones is only permitted if connected to

an external antenna.

Radio transmission components must be installed separately from the

vehicle’s electronic components.

The antenna must be fitted in a professional manner and there must be a

good connection between the antenna and the vehicle earthing point.
The wiring, installation, and the maximum permissible power
consumption must comply with the assembly instructions.

XLIV
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

Safety and operational decals

WARNING: Replace any damaged or lost decal on this tractor before

further operation.

XLV
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

WARNING
Modifications, alterations
to ROPS or use of ROPS if
demaged, is prohibited.
2.9929.699.0

1 - P/N 2.9929.699.0
Location: Left mounting driving side.

DANGER
Start only from seat
with transmission and
PTO in neutral.

Starting in gear kills.

2.9929.854.0

2 - P/N 2.9929.854.0
Location: On starter motor.

WARNING
THIS TRACTOR IS EQUIPPED WIT A
SHIFTABLE PTO: TO AVOID INJURY:
1. MATCH PTO SPEED TO IMPLEMENT
2. KEEP ALL SHIELDS IN PLACE
3. CENTER AND LOCK DRAWBAR
4. ENGAGE PTO CAREFULLY
2.9929.281.0

3 - P/N 2.9929.281.0
Location:Under P.T.O. Control button.

XLVI
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

WARNING
1. READ OPERATORS MANUAL BEFORE
OPERATING THIS TRACTOR.
2. KEEP ALL SHIELDS IN PLACE.
3. SECURELY FASTEN YOUR SEATBELT
WHEN OPERATING TRACTOR WITH
ROPS (ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURE).
4. HITCH ONLY TO DRAWBAR AND
HITCH POINTS RECOMMENDED IN
THE OPERATORS MANUAL.
5. BE SURE EVERY ONE IS CLEAR OF
MACHINE BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
AND OPERATING UNIT.
6. DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO RIDE. 4 - P/N 2.9929.289.0
7. KEEP HANDS, FEET AND CLOTHES
AWAY FROM POWER DRIVEN PARTS. Location: On left mountin
8. OPERATE TRACTOR SMOOTHLY, NO cover (cab).
JERKY STARTS, STOPS OR TURNS.
9. WHERE POSSIBLE AVOID OPERATING On left fender (platform).
TRACTOR NEAR DITCHES, EMBANK-
MENTS AND HOLES.
10.REDUCE SPEED AND BE CAREFUL
WHEN TURNING, APPLYING BRAKES,
OPERATING AROUND HAZARDS OR
OBSTRUCTIONS AND ON ROUGH,
SLICK OR MUDDY SURFACES.
2.9929.289.0

WARNING
11.START ENGINE ONLY WHEN
SEATED IN OPERATOR'S SEAT
12.APPLY PARKING BRAKE,LOWER
EQUIPMENT,STOP ENGINE AND
REMOVE KEY BEFORE LEAVING
THE TRACTOR UNATTENDED
13.USE FLASHING WARNING LIGHTS
AND SMV EMBLEM WHEN ON PUBLIC
ROADS,EXCEPT WHERE
PROHIBITED BY LAW
14.ALWAYS DRIVE WITH CARE AND
ATTENTION
15.STAY OFF SLOPES TOO STEEP
FOR SAFE OPERATION.
16.ON TRACTORS EQUIPPED WITH
RIGHT AND LEFT BRAKES PROPERLY
LOCK PEDALS TOGETHER WHEN
5 - P/N 2.9929.887.0
TRAVELING AT HIGH SPEEDS.
17.USE PROPER LIGHTING AND
Location: On left mountin
MARKING WHEN OPERATING cover (cab).
TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENTS ON
PUBLIC HIGHWAYS. On left fender (platform).
18.DISENGAGE POWER TAKE-OFF,
LOWER IMPLEMENT TO GROUND AND
TURN OFF ENGINE. WHEN TRACTOR
IS PROPERLY STOPPED SET
PARKING BRAKE OR PARK LOCK
BEFORE DISMOUNTING, SERVICING
OR MAKING ADJUSTMENTS TO
TRACTOR OR IMPLEMENT.
19.WHEN SERVICING LIFTED IMPLE-
MENTS WHICH MUST BE ADJUSTED
OR SERVICED IN THE RAISED
POSITION ALWAYS BLOCK OR
SUPPORT THEM.
2.9929.887.0

XLVII
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals know to the
State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
2.9929.754.0

6 - P/N 2.9929.754.0
Location: On top battery
DANGER

Shield Explosive Avoid sparks Sulphuric

eyes gas and flame acid

EXPLOSIVE GASES POISON causes severe burns

Always shield eyes and face from
battery Cigarettes, fiames or
sparks could cause battery to
explode. Do not charge or use
booster cables or adjust post
connections without proper
instruction or training.
Contains sulphuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. In event of accident
flush with water and call a
physician immediately.
Keep out of reach of children

2.9929.862.0

7 - P/N 2.9929.862.0
Location: On top battery.

WARNING
Stand clear when
using external control
to move 3 point hitch
2.9929.282.0/10

8 - P/N 2.9929.282.0/10
Location: Rear right fender for mechanical 3 point hitc.
Rear right and left fenders for electronic 3 point hitc.

XLVIII
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

WARNING
Engage the parking
brake to prevent
tractor movement
with the engine off.

The clutch WILL NOT 9 - P/N 2.9929.813.0

hold the tractor in Location: On left mounting
place,even thogh cover (cab).
transmission is in gear. On left fender (platform).
Unexpected tractor
movement may cause
serious injury
2.9929.813.0

WARNING

USE SEAT BELT.

Keep seat belt adjusted snugly

10 - P/N 2.9929.857.0
Location: On storage
compartment lid (for tractors
with cab).

Do not jump if
tractor tips.
2.9929.857.0

IL
SECTION I
11 - P/N 2.9929.858.0
Location: On top of right
fender (for tractors without
cab).
DANGER
Pull only from
approved drawbar or
lower links of 3 point
linkage at orizontal
position or below
12 - P/N 2.9929.856.0
Location: On top left P.T.O. shields.
L
SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL
WARNING
Whenever clearance permits:
Keep Rollover Protection Structure
fully extended and locked.
Keep seat belt fastened.
When structure must be lowered:
Drive with extra care.
Seat belt use is not recommended.
No ROPS protection is provided in
the lowered position.
2.9929.858.0
DANGER
Rotating driveline contact
may cause serious injury
or death
keep all driveline, tractor
and equipment shields
in place during operation
2.9929.856.0
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

WARNING
Personal injury could result from PTO driveline separation.
1. Drawbar supplied provides standart distance "A". Do not change.

PTO RPM SHAFT SIZE DISTANCE "A"

"A"
540 35mm (1.38 in) 356mm (14.0 in)
1000 35mm (1.38 in) 406mm (16.0 in)

1. Three-point link distance "C" and mounted implement distance "D" may not be standart.

Measure distance "B" over complete lift range for "B"

tractor and implement combination. Select driveline

length to ensure that driveline will not botton out at
minimum distance "B" and will have sufficient "C" "D"

overlap at maximum distance.

2.9929.855.0/20

13 - P/N 2.9929.855.0/20
Location: On top right of P.T.O. shields.

WARNING
DO NOT USE ETHER WITH
MANIFOLD PRE-HEATER
OR THERMOSTART
ATTACHMENT.

ETHER MAY IGNITE AND/OR EXPLODE

RESULTING IN BURNING OF THE AIR
CLEANER HOSE OR FILTER ELEMENT,
AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
2.9929.544.0

14 - P/N 2.9929.544.0
Location: On the left of dashbard.

IMPORTANT
PRE-HEATING OPERATION
ROTATE THE KEY TO PRE-HEATING
POSITION. WHEN THE LIGHT IN
DASH TURN OFF, ENGINE CAN BE
STARTED.

15 - P/N 2.9929.852.0
Location: on dashboard.

LI
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

WARNING

NO RIDERS
2.9929.793.0

16 - P/N 2.9929.793.0
Location: On front of left fender.

WARNING
Use only ATF
Dextron II fluid.
Incorrect fluid could
cause brake system
failure.

17 - P/N 2.9929.861.0
Location: On firewall at fluid reservoir.

WARNING
Remove negative
cables from batteries
before removing
solenoid cover and
before servicing
the electrical sistem
2.9929.860.0

18 - P/N 2.9929.860.0
Location: On starter solenoid

LII
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

WARNING

19 - P/N 2.9929.794.0
Location: On left and right
sides of radiator housing

Keep hands clear

of fan and belts
while engine is
running
2.9929.794.0

WARNING

Beware hot parts

20 - P/N 2.9929.791.0
Location: On left and right
sides of radiator housing

To avoid personal
injury, keep all
shields, covers and
guards in place
while engine is
running.
2.9929.791.0

LIII
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

WARNING
High pressure steam
and hot water.
Remove filler cap with
extreme care.
3808561M3

21 - P/N 2.9929.792.0
Location: On top of the radiator cap

22 - P/N 2.9929.702.0
Location: On left fender cover (for tractors with cab) - on platform under
the parking brake command (for tractors with platform)

WARNING

Beware hot parts.

Keep hands and
fingers clear of
slots. 3774440M1

23 - P/N 2.9929.847.0
Location: On left rear of engine side sheet

LIV
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

International symbols (part. 1)

LV
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

International symbols (Part. 2)

LVI
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

International symbols (Part. 3)

LVII
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

Metric conversion

LVIII
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

Conversion tables

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by

mm to in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0015
2 2

in to mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645.16
2 2

m to ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.764
2 2

ft to m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.0929
2 2

ha to acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4711
acre to ha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4047

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by

Ml to fluid oz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0351
fluid oz to ml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.413
litre to Imp. gal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2200
Imp. gal to litre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5640
litre to US gal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2640
US gal to litre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7850
Imp. gal to US gal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2010
US gal to Imp gal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8330
litre to US qts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0567

Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by

mm to in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0394
in to mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.400
m to ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2808
ft to m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.3048
km to mile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6214
mile to km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6093

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by

ps to hp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9863
hp to ps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0139
kW to hp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3410
hp to kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7457

LIX
SECTION I SAFETY/DECALS/SYMBOL

Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by

Bar to psi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.504

Psi to bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0690

Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by

km/hr to mph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6214

mph to km/hr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6093

Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by

Nm to lbf ft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.738

lbf ft to Nm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.356
Kgm to Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.810
Nm to Kgm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.102

Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by

mm to in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6102
3 3

in to mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163.87
3 3

m to ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35.315
3 3

ft to m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.0283
3 3

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiply by

gram to oz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3530

oz to gram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.350
kg to lb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2046
lb to kg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4536
kg to ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0010
ton to kg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016.1
tonne to ton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9842
ton to tonne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0160

Temperature

°C to °F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 x °C + 32
°F to °C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (°F - 32) ÷ 1.8

LX
SECTION I FUELS

Fuels
DEUTZ engines installed in tractors made by the SDF Group are designed
to burn fuels with a minimum cetane number of 45.

DEUTZ Tier 2 engines (EURO II) are approved for use with the following
fuels:

A - European Diesel fuel for Vehicles: EN 590 (App. 1)

B - US Diesel fuel for Off-Road applications:

ASTM D 975 Grade – No 1-D (App. 2) e No 2-D (App. 3)

If engines are run on fuels with a minimum cetane number lower that the
minimum indicated, there could be difficulties with starting and a
significant emission of white smoke, especially when operating in low
ambient temperatures.

Since US regulations allow a minimum cetane number of 40, special

engines have been produced for the US market (EPA versions) to avoid
starting problems, heavy clouds of white smoke or emissions of
hydrocarbons (US EPA REGULATIONS FOR LARGE NONROAD
COMPRESSION - IGNITION ENGINES).

Diesel fuels
Diesel fuels are approved and suitable for use in accordance with the
following specifications.

Fuels Specifications
EN 590 All. 1
ASTM Designation: D 975 Grade-No 1-D and
All. 2
Grade Low Sulfur No. 1-D / 2-D

LXI
SECTION I FUELS

Fuels with a high sulphur content

Using fuels with a sulphur content = 0.5 by weight-%, the engine oil needs
to be changed more frequently). The use of fuels with a sulphur content >
1.0 by weight-% is not permitted, as these are highly corrosive and
considerably reduce engine life.

Winter operation with diesel fuel

A1 Addition of kerosene to fuel

F u e l i s s u b j e c t to pa r t i c u l a r
requirements when operating in
freezing winter conditions
(filterability limit temperature).
Suitable fuels are available at filling
s ta t i o n s d u r i n g th e d i ffe r e n t
seasons.
In the event that only summer
diesel fuel is available, this can be
mixed with up to 30% kerosene, as
indicated in the following chart, to
ensure fluidity.

In the case of fuel sold on the US market and conforming to ASTM D 975
1-D/2-D, kerosene cannot be added.

A 1-1 Mixing summer grade diesel fuel with kerosene

The fuel and kerosene are blended in the tank: fill first with the appropriate
quantity of kerosene, then add the diesel.

Mixing diesel fuel with normal petrol is not permitted for safety reasons
and technical reasons (cavitation in the injection system). Winter diesel
fuels rated down to -44 °C are available for arctic climates. Fluidifying
additives can be added to diesel fuel.

The selection of a suitable additive and of the necessary dosage and

blending procedures are matters that should be agreed with the fuel
supplier.

Fuel additives
The use of fuel additives in general is not permitted. The fluidifiers
mentioned above are an exception. The use of unsuitable or prohibited
additives will invalidate warranty.

LXII
SECTION I FUELS

Biofuels
DEUTZ Tier 2 engines (EURO II) are approved for use with pure (100%)
biodiesel fuel (FAME – EN 14214):

These engines can run on biodiesel fuel in accordance with the

specifications indicated below.

Biodiesel fuels utilized must respond to EN 14214 (FAME = Fatty Acid

Methyl Ester)

Fuel Specifications
Bio-diesel Fuel according to EN 14214 All. 3

• Biodiesel available on the US market is formulated with soybean

oil methyl ester, and can be used only when blended with stan-
dard EN 590 diesel fuel in proportions including no more than
20% by weight of the bio fuel. The US biodiesel fuel used in the
blend must respond to ASTM D6751 B100.

• A power loss of up to 8% is possible, given that biodiesel has a ca-

lorific value lower than that of conventional diesel fuel.

• The engine oil must be AKROS TURBO, responding to the follo-

wing standards (SAE 15W40) - (SAE 10W30) - (ACEA E 3-96) -
(API CF) - (SDFG OM-1991) - (MIL-L-2104 E level) - (MB 228.3 le-
vel). The engine oil change interval must be halved (250 hours)
from the figure of 500 hours specified normally for tractors running
on standard diesel fuel (EN 590). See maintenance table on page
172.) 500 ore. Vedi tabella della manutenzione riportata a pagina
172.

LXIII
SECTION I FUELS

• When run on biodiesel fuels, the engine should not stand idle for
more than 4-6 weeks, otherwise it must be started and stopped
using standard diesel fuel.

• Biodiesel fuel cannot be used if the engine is run only for short pe-
riods during the full year.

• Biodiesel fuels can be blended with normal diesel fuel provided

that the special conditions for these blends are observed (type of
engine oil and oil-change interval), except in the case of blends
containing no more than 5% by weight of bio fuel, such as those
sold currently at filling stations in Europe. These fuels can be trea-
ted as normal diesel fuels.

• 30-50 hours following the changeover from diesel to biodie-

sel, the fuel filter must be replaced as a precautionary measure, in
order to avoid a possible drop in performance caused by blockage
of the filter element. In effect, if there is residual matter in the tank,
it is more likely to be dislodged and entrained toward the filter by a
biodiesel fuel. The filter should not be replaced immediately, but
only after 30-50 hours, allowing time for impurities to settle.

IMPORTANT
Pure non-transesterified vegetable oils (such as rape-seed) cannot
be used. The use of such fuels will invalidate warranty.

Biological contamination in tanks

Microbiological contamination can occur in fuel tanks, especially if water
finds its way into the fuel. Contamination from water can be caused
typically by condensation occurring naturally in the air.
Water is not easily soluble in fuel, and therefore tends to collect at the
bottom of the tank. Bacteria and fungi proliferate in the aqueous phase at
the boundary with the fuel phase, and are able to draw nutrients from the
stored biodiesel.
Fuel tanks should be equipped with water separators, so that any moisture
finding its way into the fuel can be easily removed. In addition, tanks must
be installed so as to avoid exposure to extreme temperature changes
during the day and consequently minimize the formation of condensate.

LXIV
SECTION I FUELS

Direct exposure to sunlight must be avoided, as a high fuel temperature

will favour the proliferation of microbial growth. Tanks of smaller size (in
which fuel stands unused for a shorter time) are generally preferable to
tanks of appreciably large capacity.

Engine fuel filters tend to clog at a relatively fast rate if the fuel being used
is microbiologically contaminated; performance will suffer as a result.

When fuel contained in the tank is affected by microbial contamination,

THE TANK must be cleaned out thoroughly by a specialist company.

Ask the fuel supplier to recommend specialist service companies. Once

the tank has been cleaned, remaining bacteria can be eliminated with
biocides (e.g. GrotaMar 71, Schülke & Mayr GmbH, Norderstedt),
although any decision on the use of these chemicals must be left to the
specialist cleaning company.

The owner of the engine is strongly recommended not to use biocides,

which are toxic and hazardous. The use of biocides without cleaning the
tank will serve no purpose, as the bacteria causing the filter to clog must be
removed at source.

Water
Excessive moisture content causes corrosion, accompanied by the
formation of sludge. This leads ultimately to irregular operation of the fuel
feed and injection systems.

Sludge / dirt
Sludge, or solid sediments (dust, rust, encrustations) will cause wear on
the injection system and combustion chambers, as well as leakage from
valves.

Cetane number / Cetane index

The cetane number indicates the ignition propensity of the fuel. Too low a
cetane number can cause difficulties with starting, white smoke and
increased hydrocarbon emissions, and lead to thermal and mechanical
overloading of the engine. The cetane number is determined using a test
engine. The cetane index can be used as a substitute value. The index is a
number based on the density and distillation range of the fuel, and
corresponds normally to the cetane number.
Calorific value
Calorific value (Hu) indicates the quantity of heat generated by burning 1
kg of fuel.

LXV
SECTION I FUELS

All. 1: Fuel specification ** (minimum requirement): Diesel fuel

according to EN 590:2004

Properties Units Limit values Test method

EN 590:2004

Centane number at least 51 EN ISO 5165:1998

Centane index at least 46 EN ISO 4264:1996

Density at 15 °C kg/m3 820 - 845 EN ISO 3675:1998 EN ISO

12185:1996/C1:2001

Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons weight-% max. 11 EN 12916:2000

Sulphur content mg/kg max. 350 (until EN ISO 20846 EN ISO 20847 EN
31.12.2004) ISO 20884
or 50.00

10 EN ISO 20846/EN ISO 20884

Flashpoint °C at least 55 EN ISO 2719:2002

coke residue (from 10 % distilla- weight-% max. 0.30 EN ISO 10370:1995

tion residue)

Ash content weight-% max. 0.01 EN ISO 6245:2002

Water content mg/kg max. 200 EN ISO 12937:2000

Overall soiling mg/kg max. 24 EN 12662:1998

Corrosion effect on copper (3 h at De gre e o f Class 1 EN ISO 2160:1998

50 °C) corrosion

Oxidation stability g/m3 max. 25 EN ISO 12205:1996

Lubricity, corrected “wear scar dia- μm max. 460 EN ISO 12156-1:2000

me ter” (wsd 1.4) at 60 °C

Viscosity at 40 °C mm2/s 2,00 - 4,50 EN ISO 3104:1996

Distillation max. 65 EN ISO 3405:2000

-compensated at 250 °C Vol. % at least 85
-compensated at 350 °C vol. % ° 360
-95 vol. % compensated at C

Fatty Acid Methyl Ester content vol. % 5 EN 14078:2003

(FAME)

Limit of filtrability (CFPP) * EN 116:1997

-15.04. up to 30.09. °C max. 0
-01.10. up to 15.11. °C max. -10
-16.11. up to 28.02. °C max. -20
-01.03. up to 14.04. °C max. -10

* data apply for the Federal Republic of Germany. National regulations may deviate.
** Specification also applies for NATO fuel F-54

LXVI
SECTION I FUELS

All. 2 : Fuel specification (minimum requirement) diesel fuel

according to ASTM Designation D 975-02

* Minimum requirement DEUTZ
** depending on season and region

LXVII
SECTION I FUELS

All. 3 : Fuel specification (minimum requirements) Fatty Acid Methyl

Ester (FAME) for diesel engines (bio diesel fuel)

Properties Units Limit values EN Test method

14214:2003
Ester content weight-% at least 96.5 EN 14103
Density at 15 °C kg/m3 860 - 900 EN ISO 3675:1998 EN
ISO 12185:1996/C1:2001

Viscosity at 40 °C mm2/s 3,5 - 5,0 EN ISO

3104:1998/C2:1999
Flashpoint °C at least 120 prEN ISO 3679:2002
Sulphur content mg/kg max. 10.0 prEN ISO 20846:2002
prEN ISO 20884:2002
Coke residue (from 10 % di- weight-% max. 0.30 EN ISO 10370:1995
stillation residue)
Centane number at least 51 EN ISO 5165:1998
Ash content (sulfate ash) weight-% max. 0.02 ISO 3987:1994
Water content mg/kg max. 500 EN ISO 12937:2000
Overall soiling mg/kg max. 24 EN 12662:1998
Corrosion effect on copper Degree of 1 EN ISO 2160:1998
(3 h at 50 °C) cor rosion

Oxidation stability, 110 °C Hours at least 6 EN 14112

Acid number mg max. 0.5 EN 14104
KOH/g
Iod number gr max. 120 EN 14111
lod/100gr
Content of linolenic weight-% max. 12.0 EN 14103
acid-methylester
Content of fatty weight-% max. 1
acid-methylester with? 4 do-
uble bonds
Methanol content weight-% max. 0.20 EN 14110
Monoglyceride content weight-% max. 0.80 EN 14105
Diglyceride content weight-% max. 0.20 EN 14105
Triglyceride content weight-% max. 0.20 EN 14105
Content of free glycerine weight-% max. 0.020 EN 14105 EN 14106
Content of total glycerine weight-% max. 0.25 EN 14105
Content of alkaline metals mg/kg max. 5.0 EN 14108 EN 14109
(Na + K)
Content of alkaline earth mg/kg max. 5.0 prEN 14538:2002
metals (Ca + Mg)
Phosphor content mg/kg max. 10.0 EN 14107
Limit of filtrability (CFPP) * °C max. 0 EN 116:1997
-15.04. up to 30.09.
SECTION II TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION DATA

SECTION 2 - REPLACEMENT PARTS

The use of ORIGINAL PARTS will ensure that the perfect operating
efficiency of your tractor is maintained and that operating costs are kept to
a minimum.
When ordering replacement parts, please supply the following
information:
1 - Tractor serial number and engine serial number
(in the case of engine parts).
2 - Part name and code number.

Tractor serial number

The tractor serial number is stamped on the right side of the front support.

Tractor identification
plate
The tractor serial number is stam-
ped on an aluminium plate located
on the right-hand side of the cab
console.

1
SECTION II TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION DATA

Engine serial number

The engine serial number is stamped on the right-hand side of the engine
block.

Original replacement parts

This use and maintenance manual covers all models of the Agrofarm
machine family.

The following tractors have been type approved in versions with roll bar
and with safety cab:

Model
Agrofarm 85 Agrofarm 100
Agrofarm 85GS Agrofarm 100GS

2
SECTION II TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION DATA

The approved dealer has the obligation to provide the necessary

Technical Assistance and to offer technical support through the
dealership’s own service centre and skilled personnel to ensure that the
tractor is capable of offering its maximum performance.

It is extremely important that the user should be familiar with all

identification details of the machine: tractor model, tractor serial number,
engine model and engine serial number, as this information is needed in
order to obtain replacement parts or to receive prompt and efficient
technical assistance,

Use the space below to record your tractor identification data:

∗ Tractor model

∗ Tractor serial number

∗ Engine model

∗ Engine serial number

∗ Date of purchase

∗ Dealer's name

∗ Dealer's telephone numbe

3
SECTION II TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION DATA

Version with safety roll bar (ROPS) and sunshade

Version with cab (cab offered in two versions: with standard roof, or with high visibi-
lity - on request); the picture shows the version with “high visibility” roof.

4
SECTION III USE

SECTION 3 - USE
Checking the tractor prior to starting work
Before starting work, inspect the tractor exterior for signs of oil leaks or
other faults.

Make any necessary repairs after having established the cause of the
problem.

Clean all mud, straw, leaves, etc. from the tractor.

Refuel as necessary.

- standard fuel tank capacity 150 l (39.6 U.S. gal).

CAUTION: DURING TRACTOR REFUELING, ALWAYS TURN THE

ENGINE OFF AND CLEAN ANY FUEL SPILLED ON THE TRACTOR.

5
SECTION III USE

Draining water from the fuel prefilter

Prefilter with water separator

Proceed as follows:

• Position a suitable receptacle/container under the filter.

• Open the drain screw on the bottom of the filter to allow fuel mixed
with water to drain out. As soon as uncontaminated fuel appears,
close the the drain screw.

CAUTION: WITH A COLD ENGINE YOU MAY NOTICE ABNORMAL

COMBUSTION. THIS SHOULD CLEAR UP ONCE THE ENGINE HAS
REACHED NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE.

DANGER: CONTACT BETWEEN THE TRACTOR OR ATTACHED

IMPLEMENTS AND HIGH-TENSION ELECTRICAL LINES MAY CAUSE
DEATH. IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH HIGH-TENSION ELECTRICAL
LINES, DO NOT GET DOWN FROM THE DRIVING POSITION, BUT
MANOEUVRE THE TRACTOR AND/OR IMPLEMENT TO ELIMINATE
THE CONTACT AND DRIVE AWAY TO A SAFE DISTANCE FROM THE
ELECTRICAL LINE.

CAUTION: BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATIONS, READ THE

INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL. FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS
CAREFULLY DURING OPERATION OF THE TRACTOR.

6
SECTION III USE

Checking the engine oil level

This should be done with tractor standing on level ground and the engine
switched off.

Pull the dipstick out, clean

it, reinsert fully and then pull
it out again to read the level.

If necessary, top up the

engine oil through the oil
filler.

Check the engine coolant

level.

WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE RADIATOR CAP WHILE ENGINE IS

HOT. RADIATOR IS PRESSURIZED AND IF OPENED WHILE HOT,
STEAM AND BOILING LIQUID WILL BE SPRAYED OUT, WHICH MAY
INJURY YOU AND OTHERS WHICH MAY BE CLOSE BY. THERE CAN
ALSO BE A EXCESSIVE AMOUNT OF COOLANT LOSS.

7
SECTION III USE

Access to the driving position

CAUTION: BEFORE USING THE TRACTOR, TAKE TIME TO

FAMILIARISE YOURSELF WITH ALL THE CONTROLS.

WARNING: AN OPERATOR SHOULD NOT USE ALCOHOL OR DRUGS

WHICH CAN AFFECT HIS ALERTNESS OR CO-ORDINATION. AN
OPERATOR ON PRESCRIPTION OR ‘OVER THE COUNTER’ DRUGS
NEEDS MEDICAL ADVICE ON WHETHER OR NOT HE OR SHE CAN
SAFELY OPERATE tractors.

WARNING: DO NOT STAND, OR ALLOW ANYONE ELSE TO STAND,

BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT UNLESS THE ENGINE
IS TURNED OFF AND THE PARKING BRAKE IS ENGAGED, ONE
TRANSMISSION GEAR IS ENGAGED, THE KEY IS REMOVED, AND
ALL ATTACHMENTS OR IMPLEMENTS ARE LOWERED TO THE
GROUND.

CAUTION: NEVER LEAVE YOUR TRACTOR WITH ENGINE RUNNING,

IF NOT STRICTLY NECESSARY. IN THIS CASE PUT ALL GEAR
LEVERS IN “NEUTRAL” AND PULL FULLY THE HAND-BRAKE
LEVER.

8
SECTION III USE

Access to the cab is by large

non-slip steps. A convenient
handle ensures easy access
to the driving seat.

The door handles are fitted

with safety catches to prevent
accidental opening.
The doors are fitted with key
locks.

To open the door from the outside

(when unlocked) press the button.

To open the door from the inside, push

down the lever on the door lock.

CAUTION: ALWAYS WEAR CLOTHING SUITABLE FOR THE TYPE OF

WORK TO BE PERFORMED. IF NECESSARY, USE HEARING
PROTECTION PLUGS AND WEAR EYE PROTECTION.

9
SECTION III USE

Adjusting the steering wheel

Push down the lever and

move the steering wheel to
r e q u i r e d a n g l e . L o c k th e
steering wheel in position by
pulling the lever upwards.

T h e s t e e r i n g c o l u m n is
telescopic to allow height
adjustment of the steering
wheel.

Loosen knob and position the

steering wheel at the required
height.

Then re-tighten the knob to

the lock the steering column.

DANGER: NEVER ADJUST THE STEERING WHEEL WITH THE

TRACTOR IN MOTION. THE DRIVER SHOULD MAKE CERTAIN THAT
THE WHEEL IS SUITABLY ADJUSTED BEFORE STARTING OFF.

10
SECTION III USE

Steering column stalks: direction indicators, headlights,

flasher and horn
A stalk on the left hand side of the steering column incorporates the
following controls:
- Direction indicators
- Flasher
- Headlight main beam / dipped beam switch
- Horn

(on tractors without hydraulic

shuttle, the lights/direction-indi-
cators/horns stalk is positioned
on the left hand side of the stee-
ring column)

(on tractors with hydraulic shut-

tle, the lights/direction-indica-
tors/horns stalk is positioned on
the right hand side of the steering
column)

• Pushing the stalk forward activates the right direction indicator.

• Pulling the lever back activates the left direction indicator.
• With headlights off or sidelights on, pulling the stalk up has the ef-
fect of flashing the main beam headlights
• With the headlights on dipped beam, pushing the stalk down swit-
ches to main beam, pulling up switches back to dipped

Horn: sounded by pressing the stalk axially toward the column.

11
SECTION III USE

Tractor lights
Version with platform

A - 2-position rocker switch:

- Pressing the top part of the
switch, a first click will turn on the
sidelights 1. Pressing the top part
of the switch further, the
headlights shine on dipped beam
2.
Operation of the dipped beam is
accompanied by the appearance
of a green indicator on the
instrument panel, with the same
symbol as on the switch, which is
illuminated by a yellow light.
With the headlights on dipped
beam, pushing the stalk downwards has the effect of switching on the
main beam headlights 3 and switching off the dipped beam 2. With the
headlights on main beam, a blue indicator light appears on the instrument
panel.

B - Rocker switch operating the front work lights 4

- the lights are turned on by pressing the top part of the switch, and turned
off by pressing the bottom part. With the work lights on, the symbol on the
switch is illuminated by a yellow light.

NB: The lights can also be switched on with the engine off. A warning buzzer
sounds if the key is removed with the tractor lights still on.

12
SECTION III USE

C - Rocker switch operating the rear work

lights 5.
- the lights are turned on by pressing the top
part of the switch, and turned off by
pressing the bottom part.
- With the work lights on, the symbol on the
switch is illuminated by a yellow light.

Hazard warning lights switch

The hazard warning lights are activated by
pressing the button; this causes all the
direction indicators to flash simultaneously.
The button incorporates an indicator light
that illuminates when the hazard lights are
on. This button is not wired into the auxiliary
circuit, and can be operated with the engine
off and the key removed.

Beacon
The beacon 6 is positioned at the top of the
machine, on the left, and should be kept
alight when driving on a public highway.
- the beacon is turned on by pressing the
front part of the switch, and turned off by
pressing the rear part.

13
SECTION III USE

Version with cab

A - 2-position rocker switch:
- Pressing the top part of the switch, a
first click will turn on the sidelights 1.
Pressing the top part of the switch
further, the headlights shine on dipped
beam 2.
Operation of the dipped beam is
accompanied by the appearance of a
green indicator on the instrument
panel, with the same symbol as on the
switch, which is illuminated by a yellow
light.
With the headlights on dipped beam,
pushing the stalk downwards has the effect of switching on the main beam
headlights 3 and switching off the dipped beam 2. With the headlights on
main beam, a blue indicator light appears on the instrument panel.

B - Rocker switch
operating the front work
lights 4
- the lights are turned on
by pressing the top part of
the switch, and turned off
by pressing the bottom
part. With the work lights
on, the symbol on the
switch is illuminated by a
yellow light.

C - R o c k e r s w i tc h
operating front work lights
5 mounted to arms on the
sides of the cab. With the work lights on, the symbol on the switch is
illuminated by a yellow light. The lights are turned on by pressing the top
part of the switch, and turned off by pressing the bottom part.

Version with high visibility roof version with standard roof

14
SECTION III USE

D - Rocker switch operating

front work lights 6 mounted to
the roof of the cab.

- the lights are turned on by

pressing the bottom part of
the switch, and turned off by
pressing the top part.

E - Rocker switch operating

rear work lights 7 mounted to
the roof of the cab.
- the lights are turned on by
pressing the bottom part of
the switch, and turned off by
pressing the top part.
With the work lights on,
switches D and E are
illuminated by respective
indicator lights.

Beacon
The beacon 8 is positioned at the top of the
machine, on the left, and should be kept
alight when driving on a public highway.
- the beacon is turned on by pressing the
front part of the switch F, and turned off by
pressing the rear part.

version with standard roof

Hazard warning lights switch

The hazard warning lights are activated
by pressing the button; this causes all the
direction in d i c a t o r s to flash
simultaneously. The button incorporates
an indicator light that illuminates when
the hazard lights are on. This button is not
wired into the auxiliary circuit, and can be
operated with the engine off and the key
removed.

15
SECTION III USE

Instrument panel

B F P G B

C
A
14 16 18 STOP

P 12 20

10 22

8 Km/h 24
mph MEM

rpm
SBA
6 ft 26
m

1/min
rpm

AM PM FRONT
1/min l/h % t
%

rpm

REAR
SYNCRO ECO 540 1000

O E C C I H M N Q D

Instrument panel

• Instrument panel lights: providing information about the opera-

ting status of the tractor systems.
A - LIGHTS ZONE
B - ALARMS ZONE
C - D - FUNCTIONS ZONE

• Digital indicators:
E - digital clock
F - tractor groundspeed (km/h)
G - hour counter
H - front PTO speed
I - rear PTO speed
M - tractor direction (FORWARD-NEUTRAL-REVERSE)
N - operational settings and alarms

• Analogue dials and gauges: providing information at a glance

about tractor operation
O - fuel gauge
P - engine speed gauge
Q - engine temperature gauges

16
SECTION III USE

A - LIGHTS ZONE

Lighting on - GREEN
ON - Side lights and driving beams are on.

Lighting on pilot lamp - BLUE

Driving beams are on.

Tractor direction indicator and hazard lights pilot lamp - GREEN

Flashes to indicate either the direction of tractor and emergency
stop.

First trailer direction indicator and hazard lights pilot lamp - GREEN
Flashes to indicate either trailer direction and emergency stop.

Second trailer direction indicator and hazard lights pilot lamp -

GREEN
Flashes to indicate trailer direction and emergency stop.

17
SECTION III USE

B - ALARMS ZONES

STOP

B - ALARMS ZONES ALARM warning light - ORANGE

ON - It is turned on by the electronic control unit of the hydraulic shut-
tle when the sensors signal an incorrect tractor operating status.
When the warning light comes on, the horn sounds intermittently.
In this situation the user can complete the work and go as soon as
possible to one of the manufacturer’s authorized service centres.

ALARM warning light - RED

ON - It is turned on by the electronic control unit of the hydraulic shut-
tle when the sensors signal an abnormal tractor operating status.
When the warning light comes on, the horn sounds continuously.
In this situation the user must switch off the engine and contact one of
the manufacturer’s authorized service centres.

Battery charging warning light - RED

ON - Key on No. 1 –OFF - After switching on the engine
ON WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING: check that the alternator drive
belt is not broken; if it is, contact a Service Centre.

Parking brake status warning light - RED

ON - Indicates the parking brake is applied.

Broken belt alarm - RED

ON - indicates breakage of the engine fanbelt.

Gearbox lubrication warning light - YELLOW

ON - Indicates low oil pressure in the circuit.

Brake fluid level warning light - RED

ON - Indicates brake fluid is below minimum level.

Trailer brake warning light – RED ON - Indicates insufficient hydraulic

oil pressure.

18
SECTION III USE

Air cleaner warning light - RED

ON - Air cleaner clogged: clean.

Gearbox oil filter warning light - RED

ON - Renew oil filters.
(This filter is located inside the gearbox on the intake circuit)

Hydraulic oil filter warning light - REDON - Renew oil filters.

Engine oil pressure warning light - RED

ON - Key on No. 1 - OFF - After switching on the engine.
ON WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING: check that the alternator drive
belt is not broken; otherwise contact a Service Centre.

Transmission oil pressure warning light - YELLOW

ON - Indicates low oil pressure in the circuit.

MEM

C - FUNCTINS ZONE
SBA

Differential lock warning light - ORANGE

ON - Indicates activation of the differential locks, which prevents ste-
ering.

Front-wheel drive warning light - ORANGE

ON - Indicates operation of the front-wheel drive.

“MEM” engine rpm memory warning light - ORANGE

ON - indicates that engine operation is governed by a speed stored
in memory.

ENGINE PREHEATING warning light - YELLOW

ON - Indicates that engine starting is enabled.

19
SECTION III USE

D - FUNCTIONS ZONE
1
1 - Hi engagement pilot lamp - GREEN
ON - Speed selection in high speed (HARE)
2
2 - Pilot lamp - NOT ACTIVE
ACCESA

3 - Lo engagement pilot lamp - GREEN

ON - Speed selection in mid speed. (TURTLE).

CAUTION: CAREFULLY READ ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CONTAINED IN THE OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS LISTED ON THE TRACTOR’S
DECALS.

20
SECTION III USE

Setting parameters with control buttons

The instrument panel has two buttons A and B to set some operating
parameters and to set the display of some indicators.

By pressing buttons A - B for a few moments until you hear a beep you can
then set the following functions in sequence:

• Clock
• Brightness of the instrument panel

14 16 18 STOP

P 12 20

10 22

8 24
MEM

SBA
6 26

FRONT

REAR

WARNING: A NATURALLY ASPIRATED ENGINE, WHEN WORKING,

CAUSES RISK OF SPARKES. IT’S DANGEROUS ON ALL FOREST,
BRUSH OR AGRICULTURAL CROP COVERED LAND. KEEP IN MIND
T H AT Y OU R T R ACTOR IS NOT E QU I P P E D W I T H A RATE D
QUALIFIED SPARK ARRESTER.

CAUTION: ALWAYS RESPECT THE NATIONAL RULES AND THE

ROADWAY LEGISLATION.

21
SECTION III USE

DIGITAL CLOCK

CLOCK ACTIVE PM
- Ante meridiem time (morning)

PM

CLOCK ACTIVE
- Post meridiem time (afternoon)

To change the time it is necessary to press buttons A-B as follows:

• Press both buttons at the same time to enable adjusting the clock.
• Press alternately button A to select the ho-
urs or minutes (the selection will be displa-
yed with the corresponding digits blinking). AM

• Press button B to change the hours / minu-

PM
tes.

• Press and hold down button A until you

hear a beep then release the button.

Note: When making this adjustment, the display will show the letters AM to
indicate the hours from 0-12, or PM to indicate the hours from 12-24.
You can now access the “wheel constant” function that must not be used
as it is solely for workshops authorized by the manufacturer.

Important! Tampering with constant wheel ratios can cause incorrect

tractor speed display.

Then press and hold down button A until you hear a beep indicating you
have moved on to the next function: “brightness” of the instrument panel.

22
SECTION III USE

Wheel constant
Wheel constant setting based on tyre size
This operation is necessary only in the event of a change in size of the rear
tyres.
Having identified the “wheel constant” function, pressing and holding
buttons A-B, proceed as follows:
- Touch button B once to increase the value of the selected number by one
unit.
- Touch button A once to move from one number to the other.
- Now press and hold button A until the acoustic signal (bit) is heard, then
release the button.
According to the tyre size fitted, set the corresponding value as indicated
in the table.

Impulses per Impulses per

Tyre Tyre
100 metres 100 metres
85 HP 100 HP
16.9R30 5429 13.6R38 4671
16.9R34 5168 420/85R38 4348
420/85R30 5429 420/85R34 4640
480/70R30 5429 520/70R34 4489
420/85R34 5064 460/85R34 4489
18.4R30 5277 18.4R34 4489
540/65R34 5064 520/70R34 4489
480/70R34 5064 16.9R38 4348
13,6R30 5098 340/85R38 4671
540/65R30 5429 16.9R34 3735
460/85R30 5277 540/65R34 4640
- - 480/70R34 4640
- - 14,9R38 4518
- - 460/85R34 4489

Warning plate located on the right hand

side of the instrument panel stating that if
there is a change of value referred to the
wheel constant, reprogramming of the
engine control unit must be entrusted
exclusively to workshops approved by the
manufacturer.

Warning plate p/n 2.9939.087.0 (if this

plate becomes defaced it can be ordered
as a replacement part).

23
SECTION III USE

BRIGHTNESS OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

When you enter this function the display shows LUM followed by a letter:

H - High
M - Medium
L - Low

H=High
M=Medium
L= Low

that blinks to indicate the level of brightness currently set.

• Briefly press button B to identify the required level of brightness

from the ones available (High - Medium - Low).

• Press and hold down button A until you hear a beep then release
the button.

NOTE: Fault codes are signalled by a sequence of flashes on the lamp with
the hazard warning symbol. In some fault conditions, an audible signal will
be emitted as well.

WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW ANY PASSENGERS ON THE TRACTOR

OR TOWED EQUIPMENT.

24
SECTION III USE

CENTRAL DISPLAY
Km/h
mph
rpm
TRACTOR GROUNDSPEED (KM/H)
ft
(for tractors with an electronic engine m
controller) 1/min
Only the speed of the tractor is shown in the rpm

top band of the display. 1/min

rpm
While the engine speed indicator is not
activated (already given by the analogue dial SYNCRO ECO 540 1000

gauge).

(for tractors with a mechanical engine controller)

The top of the display shows engine speed (also shown by the analog rev
counter).
Tractor speed.
Tractor speed readout is not enabled.

HOUR COUNTER
The second band of the display shows the tractor’s working hours.

Alternately pressing button A cyclically displays the tractor’s total hour

count or only for tractor with an electronic engine controller the distance
travelled.

Km/h
When the instrument panel is switched on, the mph
rpm
total hour counter (hourglass) is displayed.
ft
m
Briefly (< 2 seconds) pressing button A
1/min
displays the distance travelled (given in “m” rpm
metres or “ft” feet depending on the factory 1/min
setting for the intended market). Briefly rpm
pressing button A again takes you back to the SYNCRO ECO 540 1000

display of the total hour count.

While the distance travelled is displayed,

pressing button A for a longer time (> 2 seconds) resets the count.

Note: The total count of the distance travelled is lost if the battery cable is
disconnected. It is not possible to reset the total hour counter

25
SECTION III USE

The third band of the display shows the speed of the front PTO

Km/h
mph
rpm
Selecting the front PTO
switches on the warning light ft
alongside the display and m
when the output shaft starts to
1/min
turn the display will show the rpm
speed of rotation.
FRONT
1/min
rpm
SYNCRO ECO 540 1000

The fourth band of the display shows the speed of the rear PTO

Km/h
mph
S e l e c t i n g th e r e a r P TO rpm
switches on the warning light ft
alongside the display and m
when the output shaft starts to
turn the display will show the 1/min
rpm
speed of rotation.
1/min
rpm

REAR
SYNCRO ECO 540 1000

The warning light will come on at the bottom of the display indicating the
type of selection made: SYNCRO/ECO/540/1000

26
SECTION III USE

OPERATIONAL SETTINGS AND ALARMS

%
l/h % t

This display shows the following functions:

- Selected direction indicator, only for tractor with

hydraulic shuttle, the two warning lights next to the
graphics indicate the selected direction
(Top light on - forward drive engaged)
(Bottom light on - reverse drive engaged)

1 2 3 4 5

%
l/h % t

In addition, when the engine is switched on the display shows the trip hour
counter constantly. The other functions indicated by the symbols are not
active on this family of tractors.

Functions represented by symbols:

1 - CONSUMPTION (not active)
2 - AREA WORKED (not active)
3 - POWER DELIVERED IN % (not active)
4 - WORK TRIP HOUR COUNTER (active)
5 - WHEEL/SLIP CONSTANT (not contemplated on this tractor)

27
SECTION III USE

TRIP HOUR COUNTER

Normally, during work, the display shows the partial number of hours
worked by the tractor.

This function is indicated by the hourglass symbol on the display.

To reset the trip hour counter, briefly press button B

Note: The total count is lost if the battery cable is disconnected.

%
l/h % t

CAUTION: IT’S IMPORTANT TO RESPECT THE ENVIROMENT AND

TO FOLLOW THE ANTI-POLLUTION RULES. ANY FLUID (OIL, FUEL,
COOLANT) OR FILTERS AND BATTERIES HAVE TO BE WASTED, BY
FOLLOWING THE LOCAL RULES.

WARNING: IF THE TRACTOR BEGINS TO TURNOVER, HOLD ON TO

THE STEERING WHEEL. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO JUMP CLEAR.

28
SECTION III USE

Dial-type engine temperature gauge

Indicates engine temperature

Ensure that the needle never enters the red

sector.

When the dial moves onto the red zone of the

sector the warning light comes on too.

CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATATE ENGINE UNTIL FUEL TANK IS

ENPTY. IF ENGINE IS RUN OUT OF FUEL, IT WILL BECOME
NECESSARY TO BLEED AIR FROM FUEL SYSTEM.

Dial-type fuel gauge

The gauge indicates the quantity of diesel in
the fuel tank.
Standard fuel tank capacity 150 l (38.6 U.S.
gal).

When the quantity of diesel falls below 10 litres

(2.64 U.S. gal) the warning light comes on to
signal the reserve quantity.

NOTE: If the needle enters the red section, switch off the engine
immediately.

NOTE: If the needle is in the blue section of the scale, the temperature is too
low; wait until the needle enters the white section before putting the engine
under load.

WARNING: IF THE NEEDLE ENTERS THE RED SECTION, SWITCH

OFF THE ENGINE IMMEDIATELY.
IF THE NEEDLE IS IN THE BLUE SECTION, THE TEMPERATURE IS
TOO LOW; WAIT UNTIL THE NEEDLE ENTERS THE WHITE SECTION
BEFORE PUTTING THE ENGINE UNDER LOAD.

29
SECTION III USE

Electronic dial-type rev counter

14 16 18
12 20

10 22

8 24

6 26

The outer scale indicates engine rpm.

Engine STOP control

The engine will shut off when the key is turned to the STOP position.

30
SECTION III USE

Ignition switch

Ignition switch

Controls and checkover instruments

Ignition switch

Electrical system deenergized - key removable;

active electric circuit: - Lamps indicating operation of the

alternator and low engine oil pressure light up on the
instrument panel.

Engine starting

NOTE: Turning the key to the position on the instrument panel

briefly switches on all warning and indicator lights to check their
operation (a buzzer sounds as the check is being performed).

Thereafter, certain of the indicator and warning lights remain on: al-
ternator operation, low engine oil pressure and low transmission oil
pressure (all red), and preheat system (yellow).

WARNING: BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE MAKE SURE THERE IS

PLENTY OF VENTILATION. DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE IN A
C L O S E D B U I L D I N G. T H E E X H AUS T F U M E S M AY C AU S E
ASPHYXIATION.

31
SECTION III USE

Engine - first 100 work hours

The tractor is delivered to the customer ready for use under full power,
thanks to the exhaustive inspections to which the engine is subjected in
our testing rooms.

N e ve r th e l e s s , F O R TH E F IR S T 5 0 H O U R S ' R U N N IN G, it is
recommended that the tractor not be run at maximum load for long periods
so as to enable the piston rings and the various moving parts to bed in
properly.

During this period we strongly advise to refrain from running the engine at
low r.p.m.s or high r.p.m.s for a long time when in neutral, as either
situation is harmful and would result in engine components becoming
bedded in such a way that MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE will not be
guaranteed.

IMPORTANT: THE SAFETY SEAL ON THE ENGINE GOVERNOR IS

APPLIED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND ENSURES THAT THE
POWER OUTPUT OF YOUR TRACTOR DOES NOT EXCEED THE
DECLARED AND APPROVED VALUE.ANY TAMPERING WITH THIS
SEAL ON THE GOVERNOR WILL VOID THE WARRANTY FOR THE
ENTIRE TRACTOR WITH IMMEDIATE EFFECT.

CAUTION: BY LOW TEMPERATURE, AFTER STARTING KEEP THE

ENGINE NOT ABOVE 1800 REV/MIN, UNTIL IT HAS REACHED THE
NORMAL WORKING TEMPERATURE.

DANGER: DO NOT USE AEROSOL CANS OF STARTING AID ON

TRACTORS WITH THE THERMOSTART CONNECTED TO THE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. ETHER COMBINED WITH THERMOSTART
CAN CAUS E AN E X P LOS ION W ITH DAM AGE TO E NGINE ,
PERSONAL INJURY, OR BOTH.

32
SECTION III USE

For a good running-in, the following rules should be observed:

• whenever the engine is started up, it should be left idling for a few
minutes;

• avoid using the engine continuously at low or at high idling speeds

with light loads;

• during the first 20 hours' work do not use the engine with excessi-
vely high loads; use tractor under full load for gradually longer pe-
riods;

• before stopping the engine, let it run for a few minutes at low idling
speed;

• the maintenance operations and checks listed below should be

performed most conscientiously:

during the initial engine oil level: check frequently

work phase

at 50 hours change engine oil use recommended oil only;

and replace oil filter: before fitting the filter,
oil the sealing ring

DANGER: NEVER START THE ENGINE BY SHORT-CIRCUITING THE

STARTER ENGINE’S TERMINALS. THIS MAY CAUSE SUDDEN
TAKE-OFFS WHICH COULD BE VERY DANGEROUS TO THE
OPERATOR.

CAUTION: AFTER SOME HOURS OF HEAVY WORK, LET THE

ENGINE IDLE FOR A FEW MINUTES BEFORE STOPPING IT. THIS IS
TO PREVENT THE TURBINE FROM ROTATING THROUGH INERTIA
WITHOUT SUFFICIENT LUBRICATION.

33
SECTION III USEù

Starting the engine

These tractors are equipped with electronic devices to ensure that the
operations of starting the engine and parking will be performed safely.
To start the engine, proceed as follows:
Sit in the driving seat. The engine will not start unless the seat is occupied.
• Switch off all the electrical equipment powered by the battery
(lights, direction indicators, blower, wipers, heating, air conditio-
ning).
• Move the controls of the rear PTO and front PTO (if installed) to
the disengaged positions (indicator light off).

To start the engine:

Insert the key in the starter switch and turn it onto the symbol ; all
warning lights and indicators will illuminate briefly on the instrument panel
(lamp test, during which a buzzer sounds).
In this position, certain of the indicator and warning lights remain on:
alternator operation, low engine oil pressure and low transmission oil
pressure (all red), and preheat system (yellow).

The yellow indicator light A of the electronic preheat system may

illuminate in two different ways:

1 - A brief flash, indicating that the engine can be started (as long as the
temperature of the coolant is higher than 5°C) without using the preheat
system.

2 - A continuous flash, indicating that the preheat system has been

activated electronically (when the temperature of the engine coolant is
below 5 °C).

Starting without preheat:

• Depress the clutch pedal and position the gearshift lever in neu-
tral.
• start the engine by turning the key to the position and throttling
as necessary.
• Once the engine is running, release the key, which will return au-
tomatically to the position .

34
SECTION III USE

Starting with preheat:

• Depress the clutch pedal and position the gearshift lever in neutral.
• The yellow indicator light remains on permanently, to indicate that
the preheat system has been activated electronically; once the yel-
low indicator extinguishes, start the engine by turning the key to
the position and throttling as necessary.
• Once the engine is running, release the key, which will return auto-
matically to the position .

MEM

SBA

A - Preheating stage activation indicator light

WARNING: if the alternator warning light (page 18) stays on after the
engine has been started, post-heating is not activated; in this instance,
throttle the engine by pressing the accelerator pedal momentarily so that
the alternator warning light extinguishes.

Stopping the tractor

If the engine is particularly hot, let it continue to run at idling speed for a few
minutes.
Position the gearshift lever in neutral, and turn the key to the position .

35
SECTION III USE

WARNING: DO NOT DISENGAGE THE CLUTCH OR ATTEMPT TO

SHIFT GEAR AFTER YOU HAVE STARTED DOWNHILL.

WARNING: IF THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT STAYS ON

WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING, SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE
IMMEDIATELY.

DANGER: TAKE CARE NOT TO CAUSE DANGEROUS SPARKS

WHEN WORKING IN PROXIMITY TO FUEL DEPOSITS OR OTHER
FLAMMABLE MATERIAL.

WAR N I N G : D I E S E L E N G I N E E X H AU S T AN D S O M E OF I T S
CONSTITUENTS ARE KNOWN TO SOME STATES TO CAUSE
CANCER, BIRTH DEFECTS AND OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM.

36
SECTION III USE

Cold starting
Diesel engines are to be refuelled exclusively with diesel fuel of the type
normally commercially available and which conforms to the requirements
of the applicable standards.
In winter, when the temperature falls below 0° C (32°F), it is essential to
use only winter diesel fuel, which allows the engine to run correctly at
temperatures down to –20°C (-4°F).
If summer diesel fuel is used at low temperatures, the molecules of
paraffin contained in the fuel will be deposited on the filters which will
therefore become clogged and prevent the fuel from arriving at the
injection pump.
In certain countries, diesel fuel containing special additives is available
which are suitable for temperatures even below –20°C (-4°F).
If winter diesel fuel is not available (or if it is available but the temperature
is below –20°C (-4°F) kerosene (paraffin oil) may be added in the
percentages indicated in the diagram.
Y +32 0
1
+23 -5

+14 - 10
1 = summer diesel fuel
+ 5 - 15 2 = winter diesel fuel
- 4 - 20 2
Y = % of kerosene to be added
X = external temperature in °C.
- 13 - 25

- 22 - 30

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 %
°F °C X

Pour the kerosene into the tank first and then the fuel, only mixing the two
liquids in the fuel tank.
For further information, contact your Dealer or fuel supplier.

DANGER: START THE ENGINE, WITH THE STARTER KEY, FROM THE
OPERATOR’S SEAT ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE
ENGINE BY SHORTING ACROSS THE STARTER TERMINALS. THE
MACHINE WILL START IN GEAR IF THE NEUTRAL START CIRCUIT IS
BYPASSED. THIS COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
ANYONE IN THE VICINITY OF THE TRACTOR. ENSURE THAT THE
ENGINE STARTER SOLENOID COVER IS ALWAYS IN POSITON.

37
SECTION III USE

Emergency starting through auxiliary battery

N.B.: The auxiliary battery might also be on another tractor; in any case, it
is essential that it has the same rated voltage and the same number of
elements as the discharged battery.
Make sure the two vehicles are not in contact.
Disconnect all battery-fed equipment through the proper controlling devices.
Shift into neutral position.
Make sure the discharged battery is properly earthed (grounded), its
terminals are well tightened and the elctrolyte level is correct.

The following procedure should be observed:

• Connect both batteries as shown in figure.
• If the auxiliary battery is on another tractor, it is first necessary to
start this tractor by setting the engine to 1/4th of its idling speed.
• Start the tractor by means of the ignition key throughout the usual
procedure.

If the engine does not start the first time, repeat same operation after 15 to
20 seconds, i.e. with stationary starter, up to 3-4 times. Should the engine
not start once again, determine it is not due to engine's failure.

DANGER: MAKE SURE YOU CONNECT THE BATTERY TERMINALS

CORRECTLY. DANGER OF SHORT-CIRCUIT!

Battery connection through the suitable connecting cables.

A - Auxiliary battery
B - Discharged battery

38
SECTION III USE

Turbocharging

The turbocharging unit has the function of forcing more air into the
cylinders. this in turn proportionally increases the diesel fuel delivery
capacity.

The increase in fuel delivery capacity is done to obtain greater engine

power.

The turbocharger unit, of extremely simple and rational design, consists of

a turbine and a compressor.
The turbine is operated by the exhaust gases from the engine (this way,
part of the gases' kinetic energy which would otherwise be wasted is
recovered). The turbine drives the compressor, which compresses the air
aspirated through the filter into the cylinder intake duct.

WARNING

1 - Never race a cold engine.

Run the engine just above idling speed for a minute or two to let the oil
warm up progressively (the turbocharger is lubricated by the engine oil) so
as to ensure a perfect lubrication of the turbine.

2 - After some hours of heavy work, let the engine idle for a few minutes
before stopping it. This is to prevent the turbine from rotating through
inertia without sufficient lubrication.
Since the turbocharger rotates at very high speeds, (70.000 to 110.000
r.p.m.) under normal working conditions, even a few seconds of poor
lubrication may lead to irreparable damage.

39
SECTION III USE

Adjusting the driver’s seat

All seats are equipped with a weight sensor

Seat with mechanical suspension

Available in two versions:

• upholstered in synthetic material, for tractors with platform
• upholstered in fabric, for tractors with cab

The driving seat can be adjusted as follows:

• Longitudinal movement of the seat, sliding forward or back, to

suit the height/build and personal preference of the driver (release
lever 1)

• Adjustment of spring response, obtained by moving the lever 2

clockwise or anticlockwise to increase or reduce the loading on the
springs, according to the body weight of the driver. The preload
adjustment on the seat is shown by an indicator 4.

• Adjustment of seat height, effected by turning the knob 3 thro-

ugh positions 0 to 3. The position selected is shown by a yellow in-
dicator located to one side of the knob.

CAUTION: DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO RIDE ON THE TRACTOR OR

THE IMPLEMENT UNLESS AN APPROVED PASSENGER SEAT HAS
BEEN INSTALLED OR MADE AVAILABLE AS AN OPTION BY THE
MANUFACTURE(S).

DANGER: DO NOT ALLOW PASSENGERS ON THE TRACTOR

UNLESS IT IS EQUIPPED WITH A SEAT SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS
PURPOSE. CARRYING PASSENGERS IN AN IRREGULAR FASHION
CAN OBSTRUCT THE DRIVER’S VIEW AND CONSEQUENTLY
JEOPARDISE SAFETY.

40
.SECTION III USE

1
2

4 3

Seat type “Grammer MSG 83/8”

1 - Lever for longitudinal seat adjustment
2 - Spring response adjustment lever
3 - Height adjustment knob
4 - Seat suspension preload indicator

IMPORTANT:
A buzzer alarm sounds for approximately 10 seconds if the engine is switched off
without first having pulled the parking brake lever to its full travel. The buzzer also
sounds if the seat is vacated with the engine running.

DANGER: NEVER ADJUST THE SEAT WHILE THE TRACTOR IS IN

MOTION!

41
SECTION III USE

Seat with fluid suspension

(for tractors with cab only)

The generously proportioned driver’s seat with pneumatic suspension is

contoured to give all-round anatomical support and upholstered in
non-slip material.
The seat self-adjusts to the weight of the driver and is adjustable for
position back and forward, rake and lumbar support; it can therefore be set
up perfectly to suit the height, weight and build of the occupant.
It is equipped with an electropneumatic suspension system ensuring
maximum comfort, even when moving at high speed over rough terrain or
on uneven road surfaces; the operator rides on an air cushion affording
protection from bumps and jolts.
The system incorporates a compressor housed inside the seat base that
automatically adjusts the suspension to suit the weight of the driver.

Longitudinal seat adjustment

Operating the lever, the seat can be
slid forward or back, according to
height, build and personal
preference.

Seat height adjustment

Pulling the button activates the
compressor, and the seat can be
raised to the required height.
Pushing the button has the effect of
exhausting the air cushion in the
damper, and the seat can be lowered
to the required position. The
indicator located to one side shows
the response setting of the cushion,
and ranges from yellow to green
when rotated.

Backrest adjustment
Pressing the lever, the rake angle of the
backrest can be varied to suit the prefe-
rence of the operator.

42
SECTION III USE

4
1

3 2

Driver’s seat
1 - Longitudinal adjustment lever
2 - Seat height and suspension preload adjustment
2 - Cushion response adjustment lever
4 - Automatic seat height adjustment lever
5 - Rake adjustment lever
6 - Backrest lumbar support adjustment knob
IMPORTANT:
A buzzer alarm sounds for approximately 10 seconds if the engine is
switched off without first having pulled the parking brake lever to its full
travel. The buzzer also sounds if the seat is vacated with the engine
running.

Backrest curvature adjustment

Turn the knob to increase or redu-
ce the depth of lumbar support.

43
SECTION III USE

Seat belts
Seat belts, which are a legal requirement in certain countries, are fitted as
optional equipment. If your tractor is not originally equipped with seat
belts, retrofit seat belt kits can be ordered from our Parts Service.
Contact your local Dealer for further information.

To fasten the seat belt, insert the

blade A into the slot B.

To relase the seat belt, press button

A
C.
B C
N.B.: Seat belts are fitted as standard
equipment when sold in North
America.

To adjust the seat belt:

pull end D to shorten the belt E

or end E to lengthen the belt.

D

CAUTION: ALWAYS FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT. THE USE OF A SEAT

BELT REDUCES THE RISK OF SERIOUS INJURY IN CASE OF AN
ACCIDENT.

44
SECTION III USE

Adjusting the rearview mirrors

Two mirrors (one each side) with telescopic arm
For maximum control when performing difficult manoeuvres it is vital that
the rearview mirrors are correctly adjusted.

Horizontal adjustment
Loosen knob A and adjust the
length of the arm to obtain a clear
view of the tractor exterior or the
implement.
Re-tighten the securing knob.

Vertical adjustment
Position the mirror to obtain a clear view of the side of the tractor and the
implement from the driver’s seat.

Tilt the mirror manually to obtain the best view from the driver’s seat.

Adjust both mirrors in this way.

The mirror arms rotate about their pivots and can be turned inwards
towards the tractor to reduce the overall width of the vehicle.

When rotated in towards the tractor, the arms encounter two intermediate
rest positions.

CAUTION: WHEN TRAVELLING ON PUBLIC ROADS, ALWAYS KEEP

THE REQUIRED SAFETY LIGHTS TURNED ON. IF NECESSARY,
EQUIP THE TRACTOR WITH REFLECTING BANDS OR OTHER
REFLECTING DEVICES. DO NOT USE THE WORKING LIGHTS ON
PUBLIC ROADS.

45
SECTION III USE

Control pedals

1 2 3

Control pedals
1 - Clutch control pedal
2 - Left brake control pedal
3 - Right brake control pedal
4 - Brake pedals connecting bolt
5 - Accelerator pedal

Clutch control pedal

The clutch is operated by means of the pedal located to the left of the
driver's seat.
When disengaging the clutch the pedal must always be fully depressed
and the engine r.p.m. reduced.
Other than for short periods such as gear changing the clutch must not be
held depressed, always select "NEUTRAL" and engage the clutch.
When engaging the clutch , "IN GEAR", the pedal must be released
smoothly and carefully without excessive engine speed to avoid
excessive slippage.
After clutch engagement the pedal must be fully released and must not be
used as a "foot-rest".
Incorrect clutch operation will result in excessive clutch wear.

CAUTION: DO NOT REST YOUR FOOT ON CLUTCH PEDAL OR

PARTIALLY DEPRESS CLUTCH PEDAL. PREMATURE CLUTCH
WEAR WILL RESULT.

46
SECTION III USE

CAUTION: DO NOT DISENGAGE THE CLUTCH AND/OR PUT THE

GEAR IN “NEUTRAL” AFTER YOU HAVE STARTED DOWNHILL.

CAUTION: AVOID KEEPING THE CLUTCH PEDAL DEPRESSED

WHEN THE TRACTOR IS STATIONARY. SELECT NEUTRAL, EVEN
WHEN STOPPING FOR BRIEF PERIODS.

Brake control pedals

The tractor is equipped with hydrostatically
controlled, oil-immersed disc brakes located
on the rear halfshafts upstream of the final
reduction units and in the 4WD hubs of the
front wheels. The front and rear brakes are
operated simultaneously by depressing the
pedals.
If the connecting bolt is released, the
right-hand brakes (front and rear) can be
operated separately from the left-hand
brakes.

WARNING: ON TRAVELLING
DOWNHILL FOR A LONG TIME, DO
NOT USE CONTINOUSLY THE BRAKES, BUT USE ALSO THE
ENGINE BRAKING POWER, BY SHIFTING INTO LOW GEARS.

WARNING: DO NOT USE A SEPARATE BRAKE PEDAL WHEN THE

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK IS ENGAGED, AT HIGH SPEED, WHEN
TOWING A TRAILER.

CAUTION: INSPECT PERIODICALLY THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL IN

THE TANK. THE BRAKE FLUID TANK MUST BE ALWAYS FULL.

47
SECTION III USE

Parking brake lever

The parking brake operates
independently of the service
brakes and is applied by pulling
up on the hand-operated lever.
When the parking brake is
applied, the warning light will
show on the instrument panel.
To disengage, press the button
on the end of the lever and
release the lever downwards.

IMPORTANT:
A buzzer alarm sounds for approximately 10 seconds if the engine is
switched off without first having pulled the parking brake lever to its full
travel. The buzzer also sounds if the seat is vacated with the engine
running.

IMPORTANT: If it is necessary to park the tractor on steep ground -

over 15° (33% gradient) - put wedges under the rear wheels to block
the tractor.
It is anyhow recommended not to park the tractor on a steep
gradient.

NOTE: When working on steep gradients, take care to ensure that all
moving parts receive adequate lubrication.

CAUTION: APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE AFTER THE ENGINE HAS

STOPPED AND BEFORE LEAVING THE TRACTOR.

CAUTION: THE PARKING BRAKE SHOULD ALWAYS BE APPLIED

WHEN TRACTOR IS PARKED OR LEFT UNATTENDED.

48
SECTION III USE

Accelerator pedal

Hand throttle

CAUTION: TRAVELLING ON ROAD, USE THE ACCELERATOR

PEDAL ONLY AND NOT THE HAND THROTTLE LEVER.

49
SECTION III USE

Transmission controls
For tractors without hydraulic shuttle

The transmission includes a 5-speed synchromesh gearbox, with 3 speed

ranges and creeper.
A shuttle allows all transmission speeds to operate both forward and in
reverse.
Total ratios available:

– 20 FWD + 20 REV: 5 gear speeds x3 ranges + creeper + shuttle

If requested, GS versions can be equipped with Hi - Lo shift.

Total ratios available:

– 40 FWD + 40 REV: 5 gear speeds x3 ranges + creeper + shuttle

+ Hi - Lo

• 85 and 100 versions are equipped with mechanical shuttle.

• 85S and 100S versions are equipped with hydraulic shuttle.

Controls for versions

without Hi-Lo and with
mechanical shuttle
1 - Gearshift lever
2 - Range shift lever

3 - Shuttle lever
(Version without hydraulic
shuttle)

50
SECTION III USE

Gearshifting positions with 5 speed

For tractors without hydraulic shuttle

Version 85- 100 HP

Speed range Gearshifting Reversing N. OF SPEED

control control control (F + RM)

20 + 20
with mechanical shuttle

NOTE: Only engage creep speeds after having first selected the slow range
L, at a maximum speed of 2 km/h (1.24 mph), and with the clutch pedal
depressed or with the shuttle control lever in neutral position.

NOTE: Before starting the tractor, the shuttle control lever must be in neutral
position.

CAUTION: ONLY OPERATE THE SUPER-REDUCTION LEVER WHEN

THE TRACTOR IS STATIONARY AND THE CLUTCH PEDAL IS FULLY
DEPRESSED.

51
SECTION III USE

Gearshifting positions with 5 speed

For tractors with hydraulic shuttle

Version 85 - 100HP

Speed range Gearshifting Reversing N. OF SPEED

control control control (F + RM) ( AV + RM )

20 + 20
with hydraulic shuttle
(T 4100 gearbox
and without Hi-Lo)

40 + 40
with hydraulic shuttle
(T 4100 gearbox
and with Hi-Lo)

IMPORTANT - The super-reduction gear unit should only be used for

P.T.O. operations, which however do not require high traction effort.

With the hydraulic shuttle there is no connection between the

wheels and the engine. It is therefore essential to secure the vehicle
with the parking brake and preferably with wedges under the wheels.

52
SECTION III USE

Controls with gearbox for Global Spec versions, without Hi-Lo

1 - Shuttle lever 2 - Gearshift lever

3 - Range shift lever
N - Neutral a - main clutch control by pushbutton
F - Forward
REV - Reverse

Controls with gearbox for Global Spec versions, with Hi-Lo

1 - Shuttle lever 2 - Gearshift lever
3 - Range shift lever
N - Neutral a - main clutch control by pushbutton
F - Forward b - Hi control
REV - Reverse c - Lo control

53
SECTION III USE

Example of how Hi-Lo shift is used

The example shows speeds for transmission on 85 HP model

Select the gear and range to indicate the tw9o working speeds (command- -

. elected with the electro-hydraulic command on the gear command, without

pressing the clutch pedal).

For 100 HP speeds, see the TECHNICAL DATA chapter.

speed in km/h at 2200 rpm with rear tyres 420/70-30 - Version

40Km/h (24.8 mph) -
FORWARD SPEEDS
MAIN WORK GEARBOX
TYPES 40F + 40 R Lo Hi
(snail) (turtle)
PTO 1 RID 0.322 0.376
applications 2 RID 0.477 0.557
3 RID 0.635 0.740
4 RID 0.837 0.977
5 RID 0.906 1.057
Main tilling and 1 LEN 1.111 1.296
c r o p 2 LEN 1.342 1.565
maintenanceHay 3 LEN 1.785 2.082
making, harvesting
and general farm 4 LEN 2.355 2.747
work 5 LEN 3.125 3.646
1 MED 2.884 3.365
2 MED 4.985 4.985
3 MED 5.685 6.633
4 MED 7.499 8.749
Minor harvesting 5 MED 9.954 11.613
and s u r f a c e 1 VEL 8.732 10.188
workTransport 2 VEL 12.936 15.093
3 VEL 17.212 20.081
4 VEL 22.704 26.489
5 VEL 30.135 35.159
Using the Hi-Lo command with the gearbox allows uninterrupted power transmis-
sion from the engine to the gearbox, with a considerable increase in daily producti-
vity and significant saving of time and fuel costs.

54
SECTION III USE

Hydraulic shuttle and Hi-Lo status display

For tractors with hydraulic shuttle

The hydraulic shuttle and Hi-Lo

d i s p l a y is o n th e r i g h t o f t h e 1
instrument panel. 2
7

The following indicator lights are displayed: l/h % t

%
6
1 Forward drive
5
2 Reverse drive
3 Neutral drive 3
4 Alarm
5 “Hare” speed selected 4
6 “Tortoise” speed selected
7 “Snail” speed selected

Speed selection
Start the engine
– Select one of the 2 or 3 speed ranges at your disposal by means of the
concerned lever and shift into the desired gear.
– The speed choice depends a great deal on soil conditions, implement used,
work to be performed, etc.
– In any case, always avoid using a gear which result in engine overloading.

To check in a simple way if the engine is overloaded, it is suggested to

carry out the following test: keep the hand throttle at 1/4th of its travel, then
suddenly accelerate to maximum speed.
If the engine revs do not increase, but on the contrary decrease, this
means the engine is overloaded, then shift into a lower gear.
To make a correct choice we suggest you to consult the graph in the
technical data section.

When using the Hi-Lo gearbox, identify the working speed band desired
and use the gear and range levers to select the required configuration;
now indicate working speed with the electro-hydraulic command, located
on the gear lever, without pressing the clutch pedal.

This operation is possible thanks to multiple-disc clutches.

To change gear within the same range, manoeuvre the gear lever, after
disengaging the clutch.

To select the desired range gear, disengage the clutch with the tractor
stationary and operate the lever of the reduction gear 1.
If necessary, also operate the Hi-Lo pushbuttons.

55
SECTION III USE

Gearbox with hydraulic shuttle

The tractors are equipped with an electro-hydraulic shuttle, the forward
speeds are the same as the reverse speeds.
It consists of an oil-immersed dual clutch that allows engagement of
forward and reverse travel without use of the clutch pedal.
The shuttle control lever is on the left under the steering wheel.
The direction of travel is shown on a LED display on the right of the
dashboard.

The HYDRAULIC SHUTTLE control lever has three positions and to be

operated it must be pushed axially towards the steering wheel.
For forward travel you need to move the lever forwards.
For reverse travel you need to move the lever backwards.

Hydraulic shuttle control lever on the steering wheel

F - FORWARD
N - NEUTRAL
R - REVERSE

Therefore, without using the clutch pedal when driving, but by using the
HYDRAULIC SHUTTLE lever, you can pass from forward to reverse travel
and vice versa. For reasons of safety, engagement can only be made at
speeds of under 10 km/h. If by mistake you should operate the
HYDRAULIC SHUTTLE lever at a speed of above 10 km/h, travel reversal
will not take place until the speed falls under 10 km/h and in the meantime
the error will be signalled visually on the display and audibly by a buzzer.

56
SECTION III USE

Automatic clutch button on gearshift lever

For tractors with hydraulic shuttle

The system allows the driver to change gear without using the clutch
pedal, simply by pressing button A on the gearshift lever.

In this case the driver presses

and holds the button, moves
the lever to select the required
speed, and then releases the
button as soon as the gears
engage.
The clutch disengages
immediately the button is
pressed. Releasing the button,
pressure is modulated to suit
the particular gear engaged.

Gearshift lever for tractors with underdrive

A - Automatic clutch button

Gearshift lever for tractors

with Hi-Lo - Automatic clutch but-
ton
b - Hi button +
c - Lo button -

Shifts from one speed to another are automatically modulated so as to

ensure maximum driving comfort.

With this electrohydraulic clutch, the gears can be shifted without using
the clutch pedal.

57
SECTION III USE

With the hydraulic shuttle there is no connection between the whe-

els and the engine. It is therefore essential to secure the vehicle with
the parking brake and preferably with wedges under the wheels.

CAUTION: ON TRAVELLING ON THE PUBBLIC ROAD WITH FRONT

IMPLEMENTS, IF THE VISIBILITY IS NOT ENOUGH (TRAFFIC LIGHTS
COVERED BY THE ATTACHED IMPLEMENT), PLEASE SWITCH ON
THE WORKING LIGHTS.

58
SECTION III USE

Alarms
For tractors with hydraulic shuttle
The shuttle control unit also checks the congruity of the signals from the
sensors and the correctness of the status of the output lines.
In the event of malfunctioning, an alarm is signalled with a letter and a
number displayed on the DATA MONITOR.

LETTER INDICATED ON THE

ELECTRONIC UNIT
DISPLAY
Engine M
Transmission T
Instrument I

Here we give an example of an alarm detected by the control unit and its
respective code.

A B

35 clutch ped. pos. sensor “A” OPEN

A description of the type of alarm is given on the display of the All Round
Tester supplied to Technical Service workshops.

This instrument also enables the technician to activate the outputs and
read the status and the signals detected by the various switches and
sensors, and to access a log of the last 10 alarm conditions to be
generated during the normal operation of the tractor; in this way it is also
possible to identify intermittent faults.

59
SECTION III USE

Protection and safety devices on the tractor

For tractors with hydraulic shuttle
The system preventing the tractor from unintentionally getting started is
managed electronically by a control unit and two sensors connected to the
parking brake and to the driving seat.

Important:
If the parking brake is not applied and the driver is not sitting in the driving
seat, if the shuttle lever is operated by the driver the electronic control unit
will not accept the instruction and will sound a buzzer for 10 seconds and
the tractor will stay in neutral.

If the shuttle lever is unintentionally operated when the driver is not

sitting in the driving seat, the electronic control unit will not accept the
instruction and will sound a buzzer for 10 seconds and the tractor will stay
in neutral.

Only when the driver is seated and the shuttle lever is in position N (neu-
tral) will it be possible to control the direction with the lever.

60
SECTION III USE

Rear and front differential lock

The differential lock should ONLY be used when on a straight path and
before excessive wheel spin occurs.

The button is located on the

right of the seat (as
illustrated)

Press the front part of the

button (see illustration) to activate the differential locks. The button
remains in the depressed position, and the built-in luminous indicator
lights up.
To release the locks, operate the button again, this time pressing the rear
part.

A special pilot lamp on the dashboard indicates the locking of the

differentials.

N.B. - Absolutely do not engage the differential lock while a wheel is

spinning excessively. In this case, depress clutch pedal before locking the
differentials.

WARNING: DO NOT ENGAGE THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK IN THE

FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: ON TRAVELLING AT SPEED ABOVE 15
KM/H, ON STEERING, WHEN THE TWO BRAKE PEDALS ARE NOT
LOCKED TOGETHER.

61
SECTION III USE

Front-wheel drive
Front-wheel drive allows for high work performance: during transportation
on steep slopes, when working with difficult soil conditions or when a high
draft effort is required.

The “standard” machine is

equipped with a mechanical
control; four wheel drive is
engaged by pulling the lever
upwards. Engagement is
indicated by the appearance of a

light on the instrument panel .

Pushing the lever downwards, four wheel drive is disengaged.

If the tractor has a hydraulic shuttle the control will be an “Easy shift”
electrohydraulic type:
To engage four wheel drive, press
the button, which will remain in the
depressed position; the built-in
luminous indicator lights up as the
button is pressed.

To disengage four wheel drive,

p r e s s th e b u t t o n a g a i n ; t h e
indicator light will go out.

Aspecial pilot lamp on the

dashboard indicates the locking of
the differentials.

IMPORTANT - It is advised to use the front-wheel drive when performing

transport operations on a road only if the tractor is subjected to a high draft
effort. This is in order to prevent premature wear of the tires.

WARNING : Engagement and disengagement of the front-wheel drive can

be done only when the tractor has stopped completely.

62
SECTION III USE

“SEPARATE BRAKES” valve

This valve allows braking on the rear wheels only when the brake pedals
are operated separately. This prevents skidding of the front wheel during
separate braking and thus helps avoid damage to crops.

Braking on all f our

wheels
When both pedals are
l i n k e d to g e t h e r a n d
operated simultaneously.
For transport, transfers
between fields and when
working on slopes.

Braking on the two inner

wheels only
For minimum turning radius
in restricted spaces and to
r e d u c e ti m e s p e n t i n
headland manoeuvres.

Braking on rear inner

wheel only
For minimum turning radius
on worked ground.

WAR N I N G : B R AK E P E D ALS M U S T ALWAY S B E LO C K E D

TOGETHER WHEN TRAVELLING ON THE HIGHWAY. THIS WILL
ENSURE UNIFORM BRAKING AND PROVIDE MAXIMUM STOPPING
ABILITY. SHARP TURNS MUST ONLY BE MADE AT SLOW SPEEDS.

63
SECTION III USE

Braking actions in the different valve positions

A Valve position
B Brake pedal
b1 Left
b2 Right
b3 Linked

ON
A
B
OFF ON OFF

b1
ON Braking on one wheel
OFF Braking on one side

b2

b3

Brake valve (on right-hand side under cab)

1 - Separate Brake Valve
2 - ON/OFF Control handle

64
SECTION III USE

Power take-off

WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE PTO AT ENGINE SPEED GREATER

THAN RATED PTO RPM. DAMAGE TO IMPLEMENT AND PERSONAL
INJURY COULD RESULT.

CAUTION: WHEN OPERATING PTO IMPLEMENTS SUCH AS ROTARY

MOWERS, HAY BALERS, GRINDER-MIXER, ETC. THE IMPLEMENT
SHOULD BE EQUIPPED WITH AN OVERRUNNING CLUTCH OR
DAMAGE TO PTO BRAKE MAY OCCUR.

CAUTION: BEFORE DISMOUNTING, ALWAYS DISENGAGE THE

P.T.O., LOWER ALL ATTACHMENTS AND IMPLEMENTS TO THE
GROUND, ENGAGE PARKING BRAKE, SHUT OFF THE ENGINE,
ENGAGE THE LOWEST GEAR (IF MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION)
AND REMOVE THE KEY. WITH HYDRAULIC TRANSMISSION OR

DANGER: THE DRIVEN IMPLEMENTS COULD ROTATE FOR SOME

TIME AFTER P.T.O. HAS BEEN DISENGAGED. PLEASE STOP THE
TRACTOR ENGINE AND WAIT UNTIL ALL THE MOVING PARTS OF
IMPLEMENT HAVE COME TO A COMPLETE STANDSTILL, BEFORE
TO START ANY SERVICING OPERATION.

DANGER: BEFORE FITTING OR REMOVING THE IMPLEMENT DRIVE

SHAFT, ENSURE THAT THE ENGINE IS SWITCHED OFF AND THE
PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED.

65
SECTION III USE

Front and rear PTO controls

The front and rear PTOs are engaged and disengaged by clutches with
separate controls, located on the platform to the right of the driver.

These controls consist of

two yellow buttons with
built-in luminous indicators
that light up when the
clutches are in operation.
1 - Button controlling front
PTO clutch

2 - Button controlling rear PTO

clutch

The levers for selection of the rear PTO operating mode are located on
the platform, to the left of the driver:

A - lever for selection of operation at 540 rpm or 1000 rpm.

The selection is made according to the type and specification of

implement coupled to the PTO, by positioning the lever against the marks
indicated on the plate of the control sector.

B- Normal or Economy operating mode selector

The selection is made at the discretion of the user, and in any event
according to the type of work in hand, pushing down or pulling up as
indicated by the symbols on the grip of the handle.

C - Live power take-off selector (PTO shaft speed synchronous with

ground speed). Live PTO is selected by pushing down on the handle or
pulling up, as indicated by the symbols on the grip.

66
SECTION III USE

Rear PTO output shafts

1 - 540/1000 rpm output shaft
2 - PTO syncro output shaft

DANGER: KEEP PROTECTIVE SHIELD IN PLACE OVER PTO SHAFT

AT ALL TIMES. ALWAYS DISENGAGE POWER TAKE-OFF AND STOP
ENGINE BEFORE DISMOUNTING TRACTOR EXCEPT WHEN
PERFORMING STATIONARY PTO OPERATIONS.

WARNING:
STAY OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AS INDICATED BY SHADED AREA.
ALWAYS USE A SAFETY CAGE OR OTHER RESTRAINING DEVICE IN
COMPLIANCE WITH OSHA REGULATIONS.
NOTE: UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, THE TRAJECTORY MAY
DEVIATE FROM ITS EXPECTED PATH

67
SECTION III USE

Front power take-off (1000 r.p.m.)

The tractor can be equipped, on request, with a front P.T.O. being directly
linked to the crankshaft by means of a reducer and an electro-hydraulic
clutch able to transmit all the engine horsepower.

The front P.T.O. operates completely independently of the rear P.T.O..

Operation is by way of a button located on the instrument panel to the

driver's right.

Front PTO clutch engagement control

Pressing once on the front part of

the button illustrated, and
releasing straight away, the built-in
luminous indicator lights up, and
the indicator on the instrument
panel displaying the same symbol
as on the button will blink fast for
five seconds; pressing the same
part of the button a second time,
the instrument panel indicator will
remain permanently alight, as will
the luminous button indicator, and
the front PTO shaft comes into
operation.

Pressing the rear part of the button, the PTO will be disengaged and the
luminous button and panel indicators extinguished.
68
SECTION III USE

Rear power take-off

The following power take-off packages are available:
• 540/1000 rpm
• 540E/1000E rpm
540 or 1000 rpm PTO speed is
activated by operating the lever
located behind the driver’s seat,
selection the position as
indicated on the plate of the
control sector.

WARNING: operate the rear

PTO 540/1000 rpm speed
selector lever only with the
engine off.

Rear PTO clutch engagement control

Pressing once on the front part
of the button illustrated, and
releasing straight away, the
built-in luminous indicator lights
up, and the indicator on the i
nstrument panel displaying the
same symbol as on the button
will blink fast for five seconds;
pressing the same part of the
button a second time, the i
nstrument panel indicator will
remain permanently alight, as
will the luminous button i
ndicator, and the rear PTO shaft
comes into operation.

Pressing the rear part of the

button, the PTO will be disengaged and the luminous button and panel
indicators extinguished.

Having finished the work in hand, before disengaging the power take-off,
throttle the engine back to idling speed, wait for the implement revolutions
to drop, then press the button to operate the clutch. This will prevent the
PTO brake from overheating dangerously when drive is transmitted back
to the shaft from the implement through inertia.

69
SECTION III USE

Self-Diagnosis
An integral light shows when the function is activated, and serves also to
indicate the type of fault that may affect the electrohydraulic control.

When the engine is started, the warning light blinks to indicate that the
control system is activated.

The P.T.O. is engaged by pressing and holding the button for at least 2
seconds.

If the button is held for more than 10 seconds, or if there is a fault with the
electrohydraulic control, the P.T.O. will be deactivated automatically.

The control unit also disengages the P.T.O. every time the engine is
switched off.

External controls
The rear PTO clutch can
also be engaged and
d i s e n g a g e d u s i n g th e
buttons located on the rear
fenders; operation is the
same as when using the
ma in b u tto n o n th e
console to the driver ’s
right.

DANGER: DO NOT CONNECT, DISCONNECT OR ADJUST PTO WITH

THE ENGINE RUNNING.

CAUTION: AFTER ANY P.T.O. OPERATION, ENSURE THAT THE P.T.O.

CLUTCH LEVER (OR PUSH BUTTON) IS DESENGAGED; THEN PUT
IN “NEUTRAL” THE P.T.O. RPM SELECTOR DEVICE (540/1000, ECO,
GROU N D S P E E D ; I T ’ S DE P E N D I N G F R OM T R ACTOR
CONFIGURATION).

CAUTION: WHEN OPERATING STATIONARY P.T.O. DRIVEN

EQUIPMENT (FOR EXAMPLE WATER PUMP, ETC.), DO NOT LEAVE
THE TRACTOR SEAT UNTIL ALL GEAR LEVERS ARE IN “NEUTRAL”,
THE PARKING BRAKE IS FULLY ENGAGED, THE CAB DOOR
LOCKED WITH THE KEY AND THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT
WHEELS ARE CHOCKED.

70
SECTION III USE

Economic - 750 rpm power take-off

As an aternative to the 540/1000 rpm P.T.O., the tractor may be equipped
with an “ECO” P.T.O. with rotation speeds of 750/1000 rpm.

When the ground conditions are relatively easy, it is often the case that the
power required from the tractor engine is significantly lower than the
maximum power output.

In this case, the “540 ECO” P.T.O. allows the engine to run at a much lower
speed without affecting the implement rotation speed and working
capacity.

This results in significantly lower fuel consumption and less strain on the
engine.

N.B. - When the operating lever is set to the live ECO position, the
corresponding indicator on the instrument panel lights up.

WARNING: BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE ALWAYS ENSURE

THAT PTO LEVER IS IN NEUTRAL POSITION. THIS CAN BE VERIFIED
BY CHECKING THAT PTO INDICATOR LIGHT ON DASHBOARD IS
NOT LIT WHEN IGNITION KEY IS TURNED TO POSITION 1. ENGINE
WILL NOT ROTATE IF PTO IS IN THE ENGAGED POSITION.

DANGER: AS SOON AS THE CARDAN SHAFT (SHAFT WITH

UNIVERSAL JOINT(S)) IS REMOVED, ALWAYS INSTALL THE PTO
OUTPUT SHAFT CUP.

71
SECTION III USE

Ground speed power take-off

Ground speed, or “live” power take-off is available on a shaft completely
independent of the 540/1000 rpm rear PTO output shaft.

Live PTO is selected by pushing down on the lever or pulling up, as

indicated by the symbols on the handle.

Engaging ground speed PTO, the revolutions of the splined output shaft
are proportional to the revolutions of the rear wheels.

N.B. - When the operating lever is set to the live PTO position, the
corresponding indicator on the instrument panel lights up.

DANGER: WHILE THE PTO IS IN OPERATION, NO-ONE MUST STAND

IN THE VICINITY OF THE PTO OUTPUT SHAFT OR THE DRIVE
SHAFT.

CAUTION: WHEN OPERATING PTO DRIVEN EQUIPMENT OR WHEN

TOWING HEAVY EQUIPMENT AT TRANSPORT SPEEDS, LOCK THE
DRAWBAR IN ITS CENTER POSITION WITH RETAINING PINS AND
ATTACH IMPLEMENT SAFETY CHAINS.

72
SECTION III USE

«SENSING» MECHANICAL LIFT ORIGINAL TYPE

The power-lift assembly to control mounted, semi-mounted or towed
implements, consists of an hydraulic unit that performs the following functions:
• automatic implement position control;
• automatic draft control;
• mixed position and draft control;
• float position;
• automatic adjustment of implement lowering speed through «Val-
vematic»;
• quick implement penetration;
• hydraulic control of external implements.

Mechanical commands on the right of the driver

1 - Implement raising/lowering control lever (yellow)
2 - Work depth control lever (green)
3 - Setscrews for lift levers

WARNING: IF MORE THAN ONE PERSON IS INVOLVED ATTACHING

AN IMPLEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN. WHEN MAKING
ANY ADJUSTMENT TO THE HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM, THE
PERSON(S) IN THE AREA MUST STAND CLEAR. SERIOUS INJURY
CAN RESULT BY BEING CRUSHED.

WARNING: THE IMPLEMENTS MUST ALWAYS BE LOWERED TO THE

GROUND WHENEVER THE TRACTOR IS NOT OPERATING OR WHEN
ADJUSTMENT, MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OPERATIONS ARE TO
BE CARRIED OUT.

73
SECTION III USE

1 5 2

7
6
CAT. C

PROFILO SAE 6B STANDARD

B A
4
Lift components (3-point linkage)
1 - Lift cover
2 - Top link
3 - Lifting rod
4 - Lower links
5 - Lift arms
6 - Levelling box
7 - Sensor

A - Lifting capacity is increased when lifting rod is positioned in hole A

B - Lifting height is increased when lifting rod is positioned in hole B

WARNING: NEVER TOW IMPLEMENTS USING LOWER LINK ARMS.

PULL ONLY FROM THE APPROVED DRAWBAR OR TOW HITCH.
TOWING OR ATTACHING TO OTHER LOCATIONS MAY CAUSE THE
TRACTOR TO OVERTURN.

74
SECTION III USE

Controls
The hydraulic power-lift control levers are grouped in the special console
on the operator's right-hand side.

Lever with yellow knob: used for raising and lowering implement (sector
part is yellow), for identifying desired working position, during controlled
position duties and for mixed draft-position control (yellow and green
sector).

The range of action of the yellow lever is also indicated by a blue sector
«Float». The working range of the lever is controlled by adjustable stop,
which allows the user to identify and maintain the same working position.

Lever with green knob: automatically controls the desired working depth

in relation to the resistance met by the implement in the ground.

Its action range is indicated by the green sector with a numbering interval
from 0 to 12, and by the red sector.

This lever is also provided with adjustable stop which limits the lever's
travel in such a way that the same desired working depth can be obtained
every time.

75
SECTION III USE

1 2 3

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

4 5 6 7 8
Command lever sector

1 - Max. controlled draft 2 - Control - Green sector

3 - Min. controlled draft 4 - Lowering
5 - Float - Blue sector 6 - Mixed control
7 - Position - Yyellow sector 8 - Raising

Positions of the power-lift levers under the different working condi-

tions
• Raising and lowering the implement
To raise the implement, pull the yellow lever backwards (in the yellow
sector), until the desired height is achieved.
To lower the implement push the yellow lever forwards close to the limit of
the yellow sector.
The green lever should be positioned on No. 12 of its own sector.

• Transporting with raised implement

The yellow lever must be pulled backwards all the way.
The green lever must be placed on No. 12 of its own sector.

• Working with position control

(rotary harrows, cultivators, manure spreaders, etc.)
Place the green lever on No. 12 of its own sector.
Move the yellow lever along the yellow sector until the desired working
position is reached, setting its travel with the adjustable stop screw to
return on the next run to the same working position.

76
SECTION III USE

• Working with draft control

(ploughs, rippers, trenchers, etc.)
Place green lever on No. 4 or 5 of its own sector.
Pull yellow lever into blue sector marked with "FLOAT" so as to obtain
quick implement penetration sinking into the ground.
Pull the yellow lever in the green sector to the edge of the blue sector.

Move the green lever forwards until the desired working depth is obtained,
then lock it in place through the special adjustable stop screw so as to
obtain the same working depth during successive runs.

At the end of the furrow to raise the implement from the ground pull the
yellow lever fully backwards against its stop. When starting a new furrow
push the yellow lever into blue sector "FLOAT" and leave it there until the
implement has attained the desired working depth, after which
immediately move it back into green sector.

Working w ith s urface and underground implements w ith

simultaneous draft and position control - Mix control
When working with soil of variable conditions, to prevent the implement
from sinking more than necessary in terrains of minor consistency, the
power-lift control levers should be positioned in such a way to obtain both
implement effort and position control.

For mixed control, start work and position the levers as described in "draft
control work", then move the yellow lever backwards along the sector
(yellow and green) until lifting commences; move the lever slightly forward
again (1-2 mm / 0.0394-0.0788 in) to immobilise the implement in position.

• Working with float position

(e.g. sowing machine)
When the implement is to follow the ground contours, push the yellow
lever in the blue sector (FLOAT).
The green lever may be in any of the positions included between No. 6 and
No. 12 of its own sector.
At the beginning and end of each row act only on the yellow lever to raise
and lower the implement .

NOTE - The implements must always be lowered to the ground whenever

the tractor is not operating or when adjustment, maintenance or repair
operations are to be carried out.

77
SECTION III USE

Implement hitching control

To use, grasp the handle, extract the telescoping shaft and turn it
downwards to engage it with the detent.

Turn the control to the right or left to raise or lower the lift arms by about
8-10 cm (3.15-3,94 in), to accurately align with implements for hitching.

E
E

NOTE: When operating the lift manually using the pushbutton located on
the hydraulic control valve, always ensure that the engine is running at low
revs and never on any account raise the lift to its maximum height.

DANGER: UTILIZING THE “PUSH BUTTONS” LOCATED ON THE

REAR MUDGUARDS, TO OPERATE THE REAR LIFTING DEVICE,
NEVER STAND BETWEEN THE ATTACHED IMPLEMENT AND THE
TRACTOR. ALWAYS HAVE THE PARKING BRAKE ENGAGED.

78
SECTION III USE

Three-point linkage
The 3-point linkage is used to attach implements to the hydraulic lift.

When properly adjusted, it is suitable for the attachment of class II

implements.

The lower lift arms and the top link are fitted with ball ends for manual
implement hitching: quick-hitch couplings are optional.

The ends of the lifting rods feature slots that allow wide implements to
adapt to uneven ground.

The lengths of the top link and the lifting rods are adjusted by way of
threaded sleeves fitted with handles for easy operation.

3-point linkage
1 - Top link
2 - Upper lift arm
3 - Lifting rod
4 - Stabiliser
5 - Lower lift arm

79
SECTION III USE

Adjustment of the lifting rods

This adjustment serves to alter the transverse angle/pitch of the
implement to the horizontal.

To adjust the lifting rods:

disengage handle D from detent C turn handle D clockwise to length the
lifiting rod or counter-clockwise to
shorten it

The lifting rods can be attached

to the lower lift arms by way of a
fixed position pivot A or a slot B
that facilitates implement
attachment and allows the
implement to freely follow the
contours of the ground.

Adjustment of the top link

This adjustment serves to position the implement at the correct angle to the ground.
Shortening the top link increases the angle; lengthening the top link
reduces the angle.

Normally, when the lower lift arms are positioned horizontally, the rear end
of the top link should be angled upwards.

The distance between the lower lift arms and the top link must never be
less than 460 mm (18 in) for class I implements or 540 mm (21.2 in) for
class II implelments.
Never use the top link to tow implements.

Top link with quick-hitch end cou-

pling

1 - Retaining clip 1
2 - Top link
3 - Lock ring
3

2
7170-184

80
SECTION III USE

Lift links with quick-hitch hook ends

If requested, both the lift links and the top link of the three-point linkage can
be equipped with quick hitch hook ends.

With these link ends, most hitching and unhitching operations can be
accomplished without leaving the driver’s seat.

NOTE: When adjusting the length of the top link of the 3-point hitch, take
care that it does not come apart and ensure that a sufficient length of the
threaded end of the turnbuckle is screwed into the turnbuckle housing to
withstand the tractive force applied when working.

WARNING: WHEN OPERATING THE LIFT CONTROLS, STAND WELL

CLEAR OF THE OPERATING RADIUS OF THE LIFT ARMS AND ANY
ATTACHED IMPLEMENTS.
THIS IS TO AVOID THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE CASE OF
INCORRECT MANOEUVRES.

WARNING: DO NOT STAND, OR ALLOW ANYONE ELSE TO STAND,

BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT UNLESS THE ENGINE
IS TURNED OFF AND THE PARKING BRAKE IS ENGAGED, THE
LOWEST GEAR IS ENGAGED, THE KEY IS REMOVED, AND ALL
ATTAC H M E N T S OR I M P L E M E N T S ARE LOW E R E D TO T H E
GROUND.

81
SECTION III USE

Adjustment of the telescopic stabilisers

The telescopic stabilisers serve to prevent or limit side movement
(transverse oscillation) of the implement.

The stabilisers must be adjusted without free play (lock pin inserted in hole
A), when transporting implements and when working with grader blades,
scraper blades, rollers, mowers, seed drills augers and similar implements.

The stabilisers must be adjusted with a little free play (lock pin
inserted in hole B), when working with with ploughs, harrows, cultivators
and similiar implements, or when working in draft control mode.

To adjust the length of the stabilisers, remove the lock pin and turn the
threaded coupling sleeve.
To turn the coupling sleeve more easily, insert a rod in the centre hole
(position C ).

A C
B

Telescopic stabilisers
A - Hole used for stabiliser adjustment without free play
B - Hole used for stabiliser adjustment with free play
C - Hole used to turn coupling sleeve for length adjustment

NOTE: When coupling and uncoupling implements, turn the control type
selector fully counterclockwise.

82
SECTION III USE

Front hydraulic lift

(Optional, and only with 6-way spool valves)

Front lift

If requested, the tractor can be equipped with a front lift. The lift is operated
by two double-acting hydraulic cylinders controlled with one of the spool
valve levers located on the right of the driving position (see illustration on
page 90).

The lift cylinders are double-acting

An implement mounted to the front lift can be operated in float position,

leaving it free to follow the contours of the ground.

Alternatively, the implement can be carried in a fixed position during

operation.

CAUTION: ENSURE THAT ANY IMPLEMENTS ATTACHED TO THE

TRACTOR DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOADS
INDICATED BY THE MANUFACTURER.

83
SECTION III USE

A - Cock to deliver oil to the front lift.

B - Lowering rate control valve and antishock valve
C - Front lift.
D - Hydraulic service couplers of control valve number 2.
E - Front lift.

The valves A that open and close the flow of oil are located on the right
hand side of the machine.
With the valves A open, shifting spool valve control lever n° 1 will direct the
flow of oil to the front lift as well as to other services.
To utilize the rear pressure ports from which the front lift is supplied with oil,
close the valves A.

84
SECTION III USE

WARNING: When using

the hydraulic front lift, you
must not connect any
implements to the
corresponding rear
hydraulic couplers since
using the front lift control
wo u l d o p e r a t e t h e
implement connected at
the rear too.

The lift arms may be connected to the front lift in 3 different ways:
• Positioning without free movement, by inserting the connecting
pins in holes A and B.
• Positioning with free movement (floating), by inserting the connec-
ting pins in holes A and C.
• Positioning for non-use, by inserting the connecting pins in holes A
and D.
• In this case, for easy positioning of the lift arms, first raise the lift to
the maximum height, then remove the pin from hole B or C and in-
sert it in hole D

85
SECTION III USE

Auxiliary hydraulic services control valve

The auxiliary hydraulic services control valve enables the control of

external implements with hydraulic rams and motors, meeting the
operating requirements for all applications.

WARNING: CONTROL LEVER M UST BE M ECHANICALLY

RETURNED TO THE NEUTRAL POSITION ONCE THE HYDRAULIC
CYLINDER HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS TRAVEL. FAILURE TO
DO SO WILL RESULT IN THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT BEING PLACED
UNDER A STRAIN WHICH COULD RESULT IN OVERHEATING OF
HYDRAULICS AND DAMAGE TO TRACTOR HYDRAULIC
COMPONENTS AND/OR IMPLEMENT.

WARNING: HYDRAULIC FLUID UNDER PRESSURE CAN PENTRATE

THE SKIN OR EYES AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY, BLINDNESS OR
DEATH. FLUID LEAKS UNDER PRESSURE, MAY NOT BE VISIBLE.
LOOSEN CONNECTIONS SLOWLY, KEEPING HANDS AND FINGERS
CLEAR OF LOOSENED FITTINGS. USE A PIECE OF CARDBOARD OR
WOOD TO LOCATE LEAKS, DO NOT USE YOUR FINGERS OR
HANDS. WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES FOR EYE PROTECTION. IF ANY
FULID IS INJECTED INTO THE SKIN, SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION
IMMEDIATELY.

86
SECTION III USE

Nomenclature

Directional control valve:

A valve that can be operated to control the flow of oil from a pressurised
circuit to an outlet port. There are three main types of directional control
valve: SINGLE-ACTING (no longer used), DOUBLE-ACTING and
DOUBLE/SINGLE-ACTING.

Double-acting control valve:

When the control lever is moved in one

Neutro
direction, the control valve spool shifts to
allow pressurised oil to flow out through one 1 0 2
port and return through a second port. When
the control lever is moved in the opposite Abbassamento Sollevamento
direction, the direction of flow is reversed.
The control lever has 3 positions: pressure
port 1, neutral 0, pressure port 2.

Double/single-acting control valve:

This valve is like the double-acting valve described above, but can be
converted into a single-acting valve by way of a screw. When operating in
single-acting mode, the valve is connected to the implement by a single
hose connected to the pressure port 1; this hose serves as both the
pressure and return line (when the control lever is in the “return” position).
The control lever still has 3 positions: pressure 1, neutral 0 and return.

Double/ single acting

Conversion to single-acting -
Turn the screw A to one port of
t h e c o n t r o l va l v e w h i c h is
permanently connected to the
tank return line, so that the
other port may be used for both
pressure and return.

87
SECTION III USE

DETENT device:
Mechanical detent that engages the control
1 0 2 Detent valve spool when it is moved to a certain
position at the end of its stroke. The spool
can only be released manually by operating
the control lever.
If the spool is not equipped with a DETENT,
the control lever will always return to the
centre position (NEUTRAL) when released
by the operator

KICK-OUT device:
Mechanical detent that engages the control
1 0 2 Float valve spool when it is moved to a certain
position at the end of its stroke. The spool is
released automatically when the pressure
reaches the spring calibration value (about
130 bar). The control lever automatically
returns to the neutral position.

FLOAT device:
Device that allows the two ports to be
connected simultaneously to the tank return
Float
line, thereby allowing the implement to
1 0 2 move up and down and follow the contours
of the terrain.
The control lever has four positions:
pressure 1, neutral 0, pressure 2, Float.

CAUTION: FOR ALL TRACTORS EQUIPPED WITH FRONT LIFTING

DEVICE AND FRONT P.T.O. AND HAVING STANDARD FRONT TIRES,
IT IS STRONGLY RECOMENDED, FOR SAFETY REASON, DO NOT
TRAVEL OVER 25 KM/H, WHEN HEAVY LOADS ARE APPLIED AT
FRONT LIFTING DEVICE.

WARNING: DO NOT STAND OR PASS UNDER HYDRAULICALLY

LIFTED LOADS.

88
SECTION III USE

Hydraulic diagram of directional control valve

The figure shows the diagram of the 6-way control valve; the 4-way control
valve is the same, without spool 3 and the relative valve.
The double-acting auxiliary spool valve is used to control external
hydraulic equipment.
The controls comprise 2-3 levers located to the right of the driver or under
the steering wheel.

Auxiliary spool valves:

Version 1: 4-way
• two ways - YELLOW - double acting convertible to single acting
and with detent)
• two ways - RED - double acting with spring return
Version 2: 6-way
• two ways - YELLOW - double acting with spring return
• two ways - RED - double acting with detent)
• two ways - GREEN - double acting with float position)
N.B.: When the auxiliary spool valve is in use, operation of the hydraulic lift
is by-passed (except in “FLOAT” position).

WARNING: always return the control lever to the neutral position as soon
as the external cylinder reaches the end of its stroke, so as to avoid
operating the circuit at maximum pressure for too long and generating
dangerous stresses within the system.
When auxiliary spool valves are not in use, the control levers must always
be in the neutral position.

89
SECTION III USE

The controls
Manual auxiliary spool valve controls consist of two levers for 4-way
valves; three levers for 6-way valves.

Spool valve controls

a - 4-way valve control levers
b - 6-way valve control levers

1 - control for YELLOW coded oil lines

2 - control for RED coded oil lines
3 - control for GREEN coded oil lines

These control levers are located to the right of the driver and have three
positions. Only the double-acting spool valve with FLOAT position has a
total of four positions.

NOTE: make sure that different types of oil are never mixed. Ensure absolutely cle-
an conditions when coupling the hydraulic lines of an implement to the tractor.

90
SECTION III USE

For double-acting spool valves:

Shifting the control lever toward the symbol indicated on the console has
the effect of directing oil under pressure to the rear hydraulic couplers
identified by the same symbol.

91
SECTION III USE

CAUTION: ALL IMPLEMENTS MOUNTED TO THE TRACTOR MUST

BE SAFELY ATTACHED.

92
SECTION III USE

Behaviour of the oil flow in the hydraulic circuit connecting the

couplers and the actuator cylinders on the implement.

A - Oil pressure to cylinder - LIFTING

B - Oil pressure to cylinder – LOWERING

93
SECTION III USE

As mentioned previously, each lever will have 3 or 4 positions:

• UP
• NEUTRAL
• DOWN
• FLOAT (Available with double-acting 6-way valve only) - lever 3 -
GREEN.
The control lever will only stay in position when released, if the val-
ve incorporates a SPOOL DETENT If not, the lever will be recen-
tred to the neutral position by a spring.

• NEUTRAL: shift the control lever to the INTERMEDIATE

POSITION on the sector to shut off the flow of oil both to and from
the lift cylinder.
• RAISE: shift the lever toward the sign the console that corre-
sponds to the coupler identified by the same mark, to which the
pressure oil line of the cylinder on the implement has been atta-
ched. The flow of pressurized oil will extend the cylinder and raise
the implement.
• LOWER: shift the lever toward the sign opposite to the previous
sign. The return flow of oil will allow the piston to retract, lowering
the implement.
• FLOAT: move the control lever forward beyond the lowering posi-
tion to the float position to allow the cylinder to extend or retract
freely and thus allow the implement to follow the contours of the
terrain.

WARNING: DURING THE IMPLEMENT HITCHING AND UNHITCHING

OPERATIONS GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO ADVOID SERIOUS
INJURY TO YOURSELF AND OTHERS. WHENEVER USING
SUPPORTS FOR THE IMPLEMENT, MAKE SURE THEY ARE SUITABLE
AND SUFFICIENTLY STRONG. NEVER USE CONCRETE BLOCKS,
BRICKS OR WOOD FOR SUPPORT. THEY CAN COLLAPSE EVEN
UNDER LIGHT LOADS. DON’T ALLOW PEOPLE TO STAY NEARLY.

94
SECTION III USE

In the case of diggers, shovels

and loaders, moving the control
lever to the float position will
allow the cylinder to move
freely and thus the bucket to
f o l l o w th e c o n t o u r s o f th e
terrain.

N.B.: float position may also be used to lower the tipping body of a trailer
when the ram is operated as a single-acting cylinder. In this case it is
essential that the control valve is first converted to single-acting.

IMPORTANT: In the case of control valves not equipped with a Kick-out

valve, do not continue to hold the control lever in position when the
implement cylinder has reached the end of its stroke in order to avoid
prolonged operation of the pressure relief valve. This could cause the oil to
overheat and cause damage to the hydraulic system and transmission.

N.B.: on our tractors, the auxiliary services and the hydraulic lift are supplied
by the same hydraulic circuit. Therefore it is not possible to operate the auxi-
liary service control valve and the lift simultaneously.

DANGER: ON CONNECTING THE HYDRAULIC LINES OF THE

IMPLEMENT TO THE HYDRAULIC LINES OF THE TRACTOR,
ALWAYS FOLLOW CAREFULLY THE INSTRUCTION SHOWN ON THE
TRACTORS DECALS OR DESCRIBED INSIDE THIS MANUAL.
WRONG CONNECTIONS OF THE HYDRAULIC LINES BETWEEN
IMPLEMENT AND TRACTOR COULD CAUSE UNEXPECTED
MOUVEMENTS IN THE IMPLEMENTS, WITH SERIOUS RISK OF
PERSONAL INJURY.

95
SECTION III USE

Connection of an implement to the auxiliary hydraulic service cou-

plers

N.B. - the hydraulic couplers have 1/2” female fittings that allow
connection under pressure of the male fitting on the implement hose. The
couplers are also designed to disconnect automatically if accidentally
jerked.

IMPORTANT : check that connection hoses are of sufficient length to allow

unimpeded manoeuvring of the tractor and implement.

To disconnect the hose, return the distributor’s controls to neutral position

to release any residual pressure from the system, then pull the hose off.

WARNING: KEEP THE TRACTOR LOCKED, USING A CHOCK, WHEN

PARKING ON SLEEP GROUND, REPAIRING OR MAINTENANCE
OPERATING.

DANGER: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO UNPLUG THE HYDRAULIC

CONNECTIONS, OR ADJUST AN IMPLEMENT WITH THE ENGINE
RUNNING OR THE P.T.O. DRIVE IN OPERATION. TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN VERY SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

96
SECTION III USE

Checking the transmission oil level

CAUTION: Before connecting implement hoses to the service couplers,

stop the engine and check that the connection fittings are clean. After
having connected the hoses and started the engine, check that the
hydraulic system is functioning correctly.

Then, after having operated the cylinders a few times to equalise the
pressure (moving the control lever to the lowering position, then to the
lifting position and then back to neutral), check the transmission oil level
with the cylinders both extended (lifting), and retracted (lowering).

The transmission oil should never be allowed to fall below the minimum
level (with cylinders extended) and should not ever greatly exceed the
maximum level, as the same oil supplies both the external hydraulic
services and the transmission.

NOTE: using the tractor with too little oil in the gearbox can cause serious
damage.

NOTE: The hydraulic coupler fittings must be kept clean and fitted with their
protective caps.

97
SECTION III USE

Transmission oil filler plug

Agrofarm 85 HP

Agrofarm 100 HP

98
SECTION III USE

In the case of a single-acting control valve:

(ONLY WITH 4-WAY SPOOL VALVE)
The movement of the control levers towards the “+” sign corresponds to
the delivery of oil under pressure to the upper hydraulic service coupler
with the same “+” sign.
Moving the control lever forwards (control lever number on YELLOW
background) the oil returning from the cylinder on the implement can drain
to tank through the upper service coupler with the same number on a RED
background.

Converting a control valve from double-acting to single-acting

(ONLY WITH 4-WAY SPOOL VALVE)

Turn the screws A on the control

valve approximately 3 turns in a
clockwise direction to convert the
control valve from double- to
single-acting operation and turn
t h e s c r e w s b a c k to r e s t o r e
double-acting operation.
A

Conversion of double/ single acting control valve

99
SECTION III USE

Example of connection to a single-acting cylinder

(Trailer with hydraulic tipping)(ONLYWITH4-WAYSPOOLVALVE)

Note: hose A must be connected to the YELLOW coupler. To raise the

trailer, shift the control lever forward toward the - sign

WARNING: always return the control lever to the neutral position as soon
as the external cylinder reaches the end of its stroke, so as to avoid
operating the circuit at maximum pressure for too long and generating
dangerous stresses within the system.

To lower the trailer, shift the control lever back toward the + sign

100
SECTION III USE

Example connection and operation of a double-acting cylinder

(Turnover of reversible plough)

When the auxiliary service control valves are not in use, the control levers
must always in be in the neutral position

WARNING: DIESEL FUEL OR HYDRAULIC FLUID UNDER PRESSURE

CAN PENETRATE THE SKIN OR EYES AND CAUSE SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY, BLINDNESS OR DEATH. FLUID LEAKS, UNDER
PRESSURE, MAY NOT BE VISIBLE. USE A PIECE OF CARDBOARD
OR WOOD TO FIND LEAKS. DO NOT USE YOUR BARE HAND. WEAR
SAFETY GOGGLES FOR EYE PROTECTION. IF ANY FLUID IS
INJECTED INTO THE SKIN, IT MUST BE SURGICALLY REMOVED
WITHIN A FEW HOURS BY A DOCTOR FAMILIAR WITH THIS TYPE OF
INJURY.

101
SECTION III USE

Operation of hydraulic devices that require a constant flow of oil (e.g.

hydraulic motors)
These devices must be operated
using a double-acting control
valve equipped with a DETENT
device.

The connection must be made by

connecting the pressure line A
to the corresponding lower
service coupler for the control
valve, while the return line B
must be connected to the upper
service coupler.

The motor is operated by pushing the control lever towards the “—” sign
(lowering position).

To stop the oil flow, first move the control lever to the FLOAT position, until
the motor has slowed down and come to a complete stop. Then move the
control lever to the neutral position.

WARNING: to stop a motor, do not move the control lever immediately to

the neutral position, as the back pressure generated could damage the
hoses if the motor is not equipped with safety valves.

The maximum permissible temperature is 110°C (230°F).

102
SECTION III USE

Class “A” drawbar (optional)

Swinging drawbar of the type commonly used for towing agricultural
implements, for trailers with more than one axle and consequently with low
vertical load.

To facilitate trailer attachment, the drawbar consists of a swinging bar with

horizontal adjustment.

When operating implements driven by the 540 rpm PTO (6-spline

shaft), reduce the length of the bar by inserting the pin A in the rear
hole.
When operating implements driven by the 1000 rpm PTO (21-spline
shaft), increase the length of the bar by inserting the pin A in the front
hole.

The distance between the end of the PTO shaft and the centre of the hole
for the hitch pin should be 355 mm (13.9 in) for implements operating at
540 rpm implements and 406 mm (15.9 in) for implements operating at
1000 rpm.

2 inch
51 mm

1000 rpm 540 rpm

WARNING - NEVER ALLOW ANYONE TO RIDE ON THE DRAWBAR

OR THE LOWER LIFT ARMS WHEN THE TRACTOR IS IN MOTION.

103
SECTION III USE

Towing hitch
The towing hitch is used for towing agricultural implements and
road-going trailers with one or more axles.
Various types of towing hook are available on request, depending on the
national market.

To facilitate trailer attachment, the towing hitch can be fixed at different

heights from the ground.

N.B. - the maximum permissible hitch load (for single-axle trailers), the
maximum permisible hitch height for road use (for trailers with one or more
axles) and the maximum trailed load are indicated in the tractor
registration document.

Any problems resulting from failure to observe these operating limits shall
be responsibility of the user.

DANGER: BE SURE EVERYONE IS CLEAR OF THREE POINT HITCH

BEFORE STARTING ENGINE. LOWER THREE POINT HITCH AND
STOP ENGINE BEFORE MAKING ADJUSTMENTS, MAINTENANCE
OR REPAIRS.

WARNING: A FRONT-END LOADER (BUCKET OR FORKS) MUST BE

EQUIPPED WITH A SUITABLE RESTRAINING DEVICE TO PREVENT
THE LOAD (BALES, FENCE POSTS, ROLLS OF FENCE, WIRE ETC.)
FROM ROLLING DOWN THE LIFT ARMS INTO THE OPERATOR’S
COMPARTMENT AND CRUSHING THE DRIVER WHEN THE LOADER
IS RAISED. INADEQUATELY SECURED OBJECTS COULD ALSO
FALL AND INJURE BYSTANDERS.

104
SECTION III USE

Class “C” towing hitch

The class “C” towing hitch is fixed to the support brackets by two lock pins.
To alter the height of the hitch, remove the pins and re-insert them in the
required position.

CAUTION: DO NOT USE THE FRONT HITCH FOR TOWING

EQUIPMENTS. IT’S FOR EMERGENCY ONLY.

CAUTION: WEIGHT OF TOWED EQUIPMENT, WITHOUT BRAKES,

SHOULD NOT EXCEED WEIGHT OF TRACTOR.

105
SECTION III USE

CLASS “C” Italy towing hitch

The advantage of this type of towing hitch over the previous type is that it is
extremely easy to adjust its height.

• Pull out linch pin B while gripping and pulling handle A upwards to
disengage the pins from the guide brackets.
• Release the handle so that the pins engage at the required posi-
tion.

FAC SIMILE TARGHETTE

GRASSI CAT. D2

GRASSI CAT. D2
A B IN ALTERNATIVA STAMPIGLIARE "CAT.D2"
CON CARATTERI BEN LEGGIBILI

FAC SIMILE TARGHETTA

*GRASSI-SL11-DGM
GA-4514-C-19YY*
6t - V1.5

IN ALTERNATIVA STAMPIGLIATURA
*GRASSI-SL11-DGM
GA-4514-C-19YY*
6t - V1.5

Agrofarm 85HP
CLASS “C” TOWING HITCH with quick height adjustment

CAUTION: WHEN TRANSPORTING HEAVY LOADS (EXCEEDING

THE TRACTOR’S WEIGHT) REDUCE THE SPEED TO UNDER 15 KM/H
(9,5 MPH).

106
SECTION III USE

A
B

65
60°

G.GRASSI

D
e11
1182
D = 65,67 kN
S = 2500 daN

Agrofarm 100HP
CLASS “C” TOWING HITCH with quick height adjustment

WARNING: ON TOWING TRAILERS, BEFORE LEAVING THE DRIVING

POSITION, REMEMBER TO PUT ALL CONTROLS IN NEUTRAL, TO
APPLY THE HANDBRAKE, TO SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE, TO
ENGAGE THE LOWEST GEAR (IF MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION)
AND TO REMOVE THE KEY. WITH HYDRAULIC TRANSMISSION OR
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION OR POWERSHUTTLE, ALWAYS
CHOCK BOTH TRACTOR AND TRAILER WHEELS.

107
SECTION III USE

Class “C” Euro manual towing hitch

This hitch, only used on certain markets, is attached to the rear of the
transmission housing.

The height can be adjusted by operating lever A (moving it to the right) and
raising or lowering the hitch to the required position.

108
SECTION III USE

Class “C” Euro automatic towing hitch

This hitch, only used on certain markets, is attached to the rear of the
transmission housing.

The height can be adjusted by operating lever A (moving it to the right) and
raising or lowering the hitch to the required position.

85HP

WARNING: REDUCE YOUR SPEED, ENGAGING A LOWER GEAR,

WHEN TRAVEL DOWNHILL OR OVER ROUGH GROUND AND
BEFORE TO TURN.

109
SECTION III USE

D
e1
NUMMER
57
30

85HP

WARNING: NEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES USE THE

3-POINT LINKAGE TO TOW TRAILERS.

110
SECTION III USE

France Piton Fix towing hitch FRANCIAF

85HP-100

WARNING: IN SOME OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS USED IN THIS

OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK, PANEL OR GUARDS MAY HAVE
BEEN REMOVED FOR CLARITY. NEVER OPERATE THE TRACTOR
WITHOUT THESE COMPONENTS IN POSITION. IF THE REMOVAL OF
PANEL OR GUARDS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE A REPAIR, THEY
MUST BE REPLACED BEFORE OPERATION.

111
SECTION III USE

Class “D2" and ”D" towing hitches

• (optional)
These towing hitches are available in two versions:

– D2 - Approved for towing trailers with total weights of up to 14.000 kg

(30,864 lb) and which can exert a vertical load on the hitch of up to
2000 kg (4,409 lb).
– D - Approved for towing special trailers with total weights of up to
12.000 kg (26.455 lb) and which can exert a vertical load on the hitch
of up to 0 kg.

Both hitches can be fixed to the support brackets by inserting 2 pins A in

the required position after having removed pins B.

WARNING: NEVER ALLOW ANYONE TO RIDE ON TOW HOOK,

DRAWBAR OR LIFTING ARMS AT ANY TIME.

112
SECTION III USE

Class “C”Swizterland towing hitch

This hitch, only used in certain markets, is attached to the rear of the
transmission case.

The height can be adjusted by operating lever A (moving it to the right)

and moving the hitch to the required position.

A1;A F 3850

WARNING: NEVER TOW IMPLEMENTS BY ATTACHING THEN TO

UPPER LINK OR UPPER LINK SUPPORT ONLY. THIS COULD IN
SOME CASES RESULT IN REAR OVERTURN.

CAUTION: WHEN HITCHING AN IMPLEMENT TO DRAWBAR,

ALWAYS SECURE HITCH PIN WITH A SAFETY PIN AND ATTACH
IMPLEMENT SAFETY CHAINS.

113
SECTION III USE

Category 2 rear drawbar

This bar is connected to the lower links and can be useful when working
with certain particular types of implements.

Front towing hitch

WARNING: AN UNBALANCED TRACTOR COULD OVERTURN AND

C AU S E I N JU RY OR D E AT H . M AK E S U R E F R O N T FR AM E
COUNTERWEIGHTS, WHEEL WEIGHTS AND WHEEL BALLAST ARE
USED AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DO NOT ADD
E X T R A COU N T E RW E I GH T S TO COM P E N S AT E F OR AN
OVERLOADED TRACTOR, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO REDUCE THE
LOAD. KEEP ALL PARTS OF YOUR BODY INSIDE THE OPERATOR’S
COMPARTMENT WHILE OPERATING THE TRACTOR.

114
SECTION III USE

WARNING: FLUIDS THAT FACILITATE ENGINE STARTING ARE

HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. WHEN USING THEM, KEEP AWAY FROM
SPARK SOURCES (BATTERIES, CONNECTORS, ETC). THESE
FLUIDS SHOULD BE KEPT IN COOL AREAS AND THE CONTAINERS
PROPERLY STORED.

WARNING: DO NOT DRIVE WHERE TRACTOR COULD SLIP OR TIP.

WARNING: IF THE TRACTOR HAS TO OPERATE IN AREAS WITH

RISK OF FALLING OBJECTS (LIKE IN MINES, ETC.), WHERE A FOPS
IS REQUIRED, PLEASE CONSIDER THAT YOUR TRACTOR,
EQUIPPED WITH ROPS SAFETY STRUCTURE (FRAME OR CAB), IS
NOT ALLOWED TO OPERATE IN THOSE AREAS.

DANGER: FLUIDS THAT ARE UNDER PRESSURE CAN PENETRATE

HUMAN TISSUE CAUSING SERIOUS INJURY. IT IS RECOMMENDED
TO ALWAYS STOP THE ENGINE AND RELIEVE THE PRESSURE
BEFORE CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING LINES.

WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO CARRY OUT ANY

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ON THE TRACTOR OR AN ATTACHED
IMPLEMENT UNLESS THE ENGINE IS SWITCHED OFF, THE
GEARBOX IS IN NEUTRAL, THE PTO IS DISENGAGED, THE
HANDBRAKE IS APPLIED AND ANY ATTACHED IMPLEMENT IS
LOWERED TO THE GROUND.

115
SECTION III USE

Body

Version with cab and standard roof

The hood tilts up on hinges, allowing easy access to the engine for
servicing purposes.

To raise the hood, push

the button to release the
front catch and lift from the
front;

To close the hood, pull downwards and press firmly on the top until the
catch engages securely with the retainer.

116
SECTION III USE

Version with safety roll bar (ROPS) and sunshade

Version with cab and high visibility roof (optional)

117
SECTION III USE

Cab

The cab fully conforms to the international standards as far as safety and
soundproofing are concerned.
It can be provided with ventilation, heating and air-conditioning system.

It is available in the following versions:

• Standard
• With high-visibility roof

In addition, each version may be equipped with:

• Cab with ventilation and heating systems
• Cab with ventilation, heating and air-conditioning systems

118
SECTION III USE

WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE OR OBSCURE DANGER, WARNING,

CAUTION OR INSTRUCTION DECALS. REPLACE ANY DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION OR INSTRUCTION DECALS THAT ARE NOT
READABLE OR ARE MISSING. REPLACEMENT DECALS ARE
AVAILABLE FROM YOUR DEALER IN THE EVENT OF LOSS OR
DAMAGE. THE ACTUAL LOCATION AND ORDERING CODE OF
THESE SAFETY DECALS IS ILLUSTRATED AT THE END OF THIS
SECTION. WHEN YOU REPLACE A PART THAT CARRIES A SAFETY
LABEL, MAKE SURE THAT THE SAME LABEL IS APPLIED TO THE
NEW PART. DO NOT USE FUEL OR SOLVENTS ETC. TO CLEAN
SAFETY LABELS. USE ACLEAN CLOTH DAMPED IN SOAPY WATER.

CAUTION: THE C AB IS IN FULL CONFORMITY W I TH THE

INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS AS TO THE CAB’S
SOUNDPROOFING.BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN OPERATING IN
SMALL SPACES AND ALWAYS PROTECT YOUR EARS WHENEVER
OTHER WORKING EQUIPMENT IS GENERATING DANGEROUS
NOISE LEVELS.

DANGER: DO NOT WELD, DRILL, BEND OR MODIFY THE ROPS OR

THE CABIN. TO DO SO REDUCES THE PROTECTION IT OFFERS.

WARNING: YOUR TRACTOR IS A ONE-PERSON MACHINE. DO NOT

PERMIT OTHERS TO RIDE ON THE TRACTOR OR THE IMPLEMENT.
IN SOME TERRITORIES A PASSENGER SEAT MUST BE FITTED TO
CARRY PASSENGERS. DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO RIDE ON THE
IMPLEMENTS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT INCLUDING TRAILERS,
EXCEPT ON CERTAIN HARVESTING EQUIPMENT, SPECIFICALLY
D E S I G N E D F O R R I D E R S D U R I N G T H E AC T U AL H ARV E S T
OPERATION ONLY (NOT DURING TRANSPORT). SUCH EQUIPMENT
MUST HAVE PROVISION FOR A SAFE RIDING AREA. DO NOT
ALLOW CHILDREN ON THE TRACTOR.

119
SECTION III USE

Standard cab
Ventilation
The ventilation unit is housed in the cab ceiling.
To switch it on and adjust it, turn the electrical fan switch to the desired
speed.

When the ventilation system is on, a slight pressurization is created inside

the cab. This forces the air flowing into the cab to pass through the filter
placed behind the front grille.

The fan switch can be operated only after the ignition key is inserted.
The air flow can be regulated and directed by suitably positioning the air
diffusers.

Cab ceiling

1 - Heating control potentiometer

2 - Air conditioning control
3 - Ventilation control
4 - Pivotable air diffusers
5 - Screen demist/defrost vent
6 - Vertical air flow vents

120
SECTION III USE

Standard cab ceiling

1 - Rotating lamp control 2 - Front worklights control
3 - Rear worklights control 4 - Rear window washer pump
5 - Windscreen washer pump 6 - Rear window wiper control
7 - Fuse box 8 - Courtesy light

WARNING: CONTACT WITH REFRIGERANT CAN CAUSE SEVERE

SKIN LESIONS. IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH THE EYES, DO NOT
RUB EYES, SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ASSISTANCE.

WARNING: ALWAYS USE THE 100% OF PERMANENT TYPE

ANTI-FREEZE “AKROS FREEZE” AVAILABLE FROM YOUR
DEALER, NEVER THE ALCOHOL TYPE ANTI-FREEZE.

121
SECTION III USE

Controls located in the cab roof lining

Working lamps switches

They are provided with a built-in pilot lamp, indicating the
lamps are lit.

Front working lamps switch

Rear working lamps switch

Pivotable headlight control

Front screen wiper control

0 - Windscreen wiper off.
1 - Windscreen wiper operation
2 - Operation of electric screen washer pump
0
fitted to windscreen
1
2
Rear window wiper washer pump control
(The wiper 0 - I control is located directly on the electric
motor secured to the rear hatch)
0 0 - Windscreen wiper off.
1 1 - Windscreen wiper operation
2
2 - Operation of electric screen washer pump
fitted to rear door.

122
SECTION III USE

The air can be taken from the outside or alternatively from the inside of the
cab depending on the position of the air recirculating grille.

Fully closed air recirculating grille: the air is taken from the outside only
by way of the front grille and filtered through a paper filter placed under the
grating itself.

Either fully or partially open air recirculating grille: now the air is
recirculated inside the cab.

N.B. - It is very important that the air diffusers never be completely closed
so as to allow for a steady air flow.
To obtain a greater pressurization inside the cab, it is necessary to take the
air from the outside, therefore the inside air recirculating grille should be
fully closed.

Ventilation-heating-air conditioning (for tractors with standard roof)

Controls

Ventilation control

0 - Electrical fan off.

1 - Electrical fan on first speed.
2 - Electrical fan on second speed
3 - Electrical fan on third speed

Heating control potentiometer

By turning it clockwise along the red sector after the

system is switched on, a progressive power increase of
the heating unit is obtained.

Air conditioning control

Rotating the knob clockwise, the interior of the cab will

gradually become cooler

123
SECTION III USE

Heating system
The heater is switched on and adjusted by rotating the control knob at the
roof console, then switching on the blower and setting the selector at the
preferred speed.

To warm the cab up quickly, the knob should be rotated fully clockwise and
the blower set to speed III.

The screen is demisted or defrosted by air directed through a slot ven. For
defrost or fast demist, all other vents should be closed off.

IMPORTANT: ventilation is provided by a single blower unit serving both

the heating system and the air-conditioning system.

After reaching the desired temperature adjust the system to suit your needs.

N.B. - For ideal system operation, the engine must run at 1600 r.p.m.

WARNING:
• Before starting the engine, make sure the system is off (by turning
off the ventilation fan) so as not to overload the battery.
• After using the system at full power for a long period of time, never
turn it off suddenly but let it first idle for about 20 seconds.
• If the air does not come out from the diffusers right away as soon
as the system is started, turn off immediately and identify the fault.
• N.B. Never turn on the heating system when working in dusty envi-
ronments.

124
SECTION III USE

System configuration

The heating system consist of two units:

• Electric heater A and blower unit B installed behind roof console.
• Power supplyng set, consisting of an auxiliary alternator C located
front of the engine and driven by a belt directly linked to the engine
pulley. In the event of the system failing to operate, check the fuse
in the roof terminal box 3.

Ventilation and heating system configuration

A - 3-speed heating fan
B - Electric resistencer
C - Alternator heating system
D - Air filter
E - Pivotable air diffusers
F - Recirculation inlets

WARNING - When working in very dusty areas and a greater cab

pressurization is required to prevent dust from entering the cab, it is
recommended closing the air recirculating outlets.

DANGER: SHOULD THE SYSTEM DEVELOP A VISIBLE LEAK , DO

NOT APPROACH WITH A NAKED FLAME. REFRIGERANT GAS IS
FLAMMABLE AND ON COMBUSTION PRODUCES HIGHLY TOXIC
SUBSTANCES.

125
SECTION III USE

Air conditioning system

The system is designed to ensure optimum temperature inside the cab
and maximum confort and safety for the operator.
• However, it is advisable to consult our specialized workshops whe-
never repairs or adjustments need to be performed.
• Do not approach the system with open flames, as any escape from
the circuit may produce a lethal gas.
• Never loosen for any reason the pipe fittings and do not handle pi-
ping. In addition, do not remove the oil plug located on the com-
pressor as the gas inside the circuit is under pressure.
• The refrigerant may cause severe burns resulting in frostbite. In
case of injuries proceed in the following manner:
- if the refrigerant hits your eyes, DO NOT rub eyes, it is necessary
to immediately wash them with some drops of mineral oil and after-
wards with a solution consisting of boric acid and water (one tea-
spoon of acid diluted in 1/4th a litre - 0.26 U.S. qt - of water). Seek
medical attention as soon as possible.
- If the refrigerant hits the skin causing it to become frostbitten, try
to warm up the injured area with cold water and subsequently
apply some greasy cream.

Configuration of the air ventilation, heating and conditioning system

1 - Compressor 7 - Dehydrating filter
2 - Engine coolant manifold 8 - Condenser
3 - 3 speed fan 9 - Air filter
4 - Electric resistence 10 - Recirculation inlets
5 - Evaporator 11 - Air diffusing outles
6 - Ventilator

126
SECTION III USE

System controls

The air conditioning system can only operate when the engine is running
and after having switched on the electric fan.

The system provides fresh and dehumidified air.

Rotate the knob and set to the required speed: then rotate the air
conditioning potentiometer, bearing in mind that a clockwise rotation
causes a progressive temperature decrease inside the cab.

To improve system efficiency, part of the conditioned air let into the cab is
aspirated from the cab interior.

To improve system efficiency, vent 4 can be opened by loosening the three

thumb screws and sliding vent over to allow inside air re-circulation. This
permits the air volume into the cab to be regulated in a proportion of
5-15%.

To cool the cab it is suggested to:

• fully open the pivotable air diffusers;
• turn the electric fan control and the potentiometer all the way;
• open the cab doors a few seconds to let the warm air flow out, in
case the tractor has been exposed to the sun for long;
• use the system regulating potentiometer (thermostat) to reach the
desired temperature.

After a few minutes the small sight glass placed above the dehydrating
filter should be transparent and free of bubbles.

If not, turn the system off and consult our skilled personnel.

127
SECTION III USE

High-visibility roof
Ventilation-heating-air conditioning
• for tractors with high-visibility roof

Controls
Ventilation control

0 - Electrical fan off

1 - Electrical fan on first speed
2 - Electrical fan on second speed
3 - Electrical fan on third speed
4 - Electrical fan on fourth speed

Heating control potentiometer

By turning it clockwise along the red sector after the

system is switched on, a progressive power increase of
the heating unit is obtained.

Air conditioning control

Rotating the knob clockwise, the interior of the cab will

gradually become cooler.

128
SECTION III USE

High visibility cab interior

1 - Roof hatch
2 - Upper directable vents
3 - Courtesy light
4 - Control panel
5 - Lower vent control knob

High visibility cab roof compartment internal controls

1 - Control panel
2 - Upper directable vents
3 - Lower vent control knob
4 - Opening roof hatch

129
SECTION III USE

High visibility cab internal adjustable air vents

1 - Footwell vent
2 - Door vent

2 3
1

8 9
4 5 6 7

High visibility cab control panel

1 - Fuse box for cab electrical system
2 - Air conditioning control
3 - Heater control
4 - Front work lights switch
5 - Rear work lights switch
6 - Windscreen wiper control
7 - Rear screen wiper control
8 - Flashing light switch
9 - Blower control

130
SECTION III USE

Opening roof hatch

The cab roof features a large window

allowing improved visibility when
operating a front loader.
The roof hatch opens to allow
ventilation.
To open the roof hatch, turn the lever 1
counter-clockwise and push upwards.

Sun blind
A sliding sunblind can be positioned to prevent direct sunlight from shining
into the cab.

Front hatch

The tractor is equipped with an opening

front hatch. To open the hatch, turn the
lever counter-clockwise and push the
hatch outwards. The hatch is held in the
open position by two gas springs.

Sun roll-up canvas

W h e n p u l l e d d o w n w a r d s , it
automatically locks in the desired
position. By pressing the red button
found to the right of the support, the
canvas rolls up automatically.

131
SECTION III USE

Rear hatch
The rear hatch can be held open in two positions, thanks to the special
folding handle.

Partial opening of the rear hatch

Grip handle A, pull it upwards and then push it backwards while keeping
handle B attached to the support.

Opening the rear hatch fully

G r i p h a n d l e A , p u l l it
upwards and then push it
back and detach handle B
from the support.
To close the hatch, grip
handle A with one hand and
pull it inwards while, with
your other hand, keeping
handle B attached to the
support. Then push handle
B downwards.

Cab ceiling: the ceiling is padded with insulating material to block heat
radiation into the cab and keep the temperature down when working in
very sunny areas.
The cab is also equipped with a roof hatch.

The cab platform is covered with a "firm grip" carpet in the most
commonly used areas. It is recommended to keep this carpet clear of
earth, mud, etc. so that the operator may get on and off the tractor in full
safety.

132
SECTION III USE

Cab ceiling lamp

The inside cab light is turned on by simply sliding the ceiling lamp
sideways.

Radio AM/FM
Optional extra, located in the
cab roof lining:

At the front right-hand side on

tractors with standard cab roof;
O n t h e le ft - h a n d s i d e o n
tractors with high-visibility cab
roof;

Cigar lighter
The cigar lighter is located on the right hand side, behind the auxiliary
spool valve levers; the socket can also be used as a 12V outlet

Storage compartment
Located on the right-hand side of
the cab alongside the control
levers for the auxiliary service
valves.

133
SECTION III USE

Access flap providing an opening through which cables for external

equipment

The flap is located at the rear

of the cab on the right hand
side.

The hatch is opened by

unscrewing the lock screw
and t i l t i ng the cover
backwards.

134
SECTION III USE

Hazard warning sign

Located on the rear left-hand fender.

Wheel chock
The wheel chock is located on the rear right-hand fender.
The wheel chock must be used in the following situations:
- when the tractor is parked on a slope
- when carrying out repairs or maintenance.

Tool box
Located on the right-hand side of the tractor behind the access steps.

WARNING: « PAPER» FILTER IS NOT S UITABLE FOR THE

TREATMENT OF PESTICIDES AND SO MUST BE REPLACED BY AN
«ACTIVE CARBON» FILTER AVAILABLE OPTIONALLY. ONCE THE
PESTICIDE TREATMENT IS FINISHED, IT IS NECESSARY TO ONCE
AGAIN REPLACE THE “ACTIVE CARBON” FILTER WITH THE PAPER
FILTER, SINCE THIS IS THE ONLY TYPE SUITED FOR FILTERING
FOREIGN PARTICLES FROM THE AIR.

135
SECTION III USE

CAUTION: WHEN USING CHEMICALS, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE

CHEMICAL M ANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE,
STORAGE AND DISPOSAL. ALSO FOLLOW THE CHEMICAL
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

Wedge support
This is located at the rear of the left-hand mudguard

IMPORTANT: If it is necessary
to park the tractor on steep
g r o u n d - ov e r 1 5 ° ( 3 3 %
gradient) - put wedges under
the rear wheels to block the
tractor.
It is anyhow recommended not
to park the tractor on a steep
gradient.

Mounting for trailer brake control (Italy version)

Lifting the flap 1 on the left hand

side of the driver’s seat (next to
the PTO 540-1000 rpm speed
selector) the mounting 2 for the
mechanical trailer brake control
linkage (Bowden cable) will be
exposed.

136
SECTION IV WHEELS

SECTION 4 - WHEELS
Track adjustment
Tracks are adjusted to match the tractor to different row spacings and
implements, e.g. ploughs.
Tractors are delivered with disc wheels – non-track-adjusting – or
track-adjusting wheels – at option. Depending on the size of the tires, you
can choose among up to eight different track widths.

Check the steering angle whenever the wheel track is modified.

Furthermore, bear in mind the international ruling providing that the

distance between the outer edge of the illuminated face of direction
indicators, position lights, tail lights and top rear reflectors and the outer
edge of the tires should not exceed 400 mm (15.76 in).
Any maximum track widths which may be specified in the vehicle registration
papers for the travelling on public lanes and roads must not be exceeded.

CAUTION: BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATIONS, READ THE

INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL. FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS
CAREFULLY DURING OPERATION OF THE TRACTOR.

After any adjustment to the track width and whenever changing the wheels,
tighten the nuts and bolts to the following required tightening torques:

- 2WD front wheel bolts (M20x1.5) 20.4 kgm (200 Nm) (148 lbs-ft);

- 4WD model - bolts securing rim to wheel hub (M18x1.5) 36.8 kgm
(360 Nm) (265 lbs-ft);

- 4WD model - bolts securing rim to wheel hub (M16x1.5) 23 kgm

(225.63 Nm) (166.36 lbs-ft);

- Bolts securing rear wheel rim to flange (M18x1.5)

36.8 kgm (360 Nm) (265 lbs-ft);

- Bolts securing rear wheel rim to halfshaft (M18x1.5)

29.5 kgm (284.49 Nm) (213.37 lbs-ft);

WARNING: FOR WHEELS DISASSEMBLING AND FOR

MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR, LIFT THE TRACTOR, USING SPECIFIC
TOOLS ONLY.

137
SECTION IV WHEELS

Tyre inflation pressures

– Tyres for front 2WD: 2.3 bar (33 psi)
– Tyres for front 4WD: 1.6 bar (23 psi)
– Rear tyres: 1.3 bar (19 psi)

For the tyre bead to seat correctly on the rim, the inflation pressure must
never exceed 5 bar (72.52 psi). Higher inflations pressures may cause the
tyre/rim to explode.
We recommend the use of metal safety cages or tyre restraint bars when
carrying out operations that require tyre inflation pressures above the
values for normal use.

WARNING: FOR THE TYRE BEAD TO SEAT CORRECTLY ON THE

RIM, THE INFLATION PRESSURE MUST NEVER EXCEED 5 BAR (72
PSI).
HIGHER INFLATIONS PRESSURES MAY CAUSE THE TYRE/RIM TO
EXPLODE.
WE RECOMMEND THE USE OF METAL SAFETY CAGES OR TYRE
RESTRAINT BARS WHEN CARRYING OUT OPERATIONS THAT
REQUIRE TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES ABOVE THE VALUES FOR
NORMAL USE.

IMPORTANT - When working on agricultural land in conditions requiring

maximum grip, the rear tyre inflation pressure may be reduced to a
minimum of 0.8 bar (11.60 psi). The normal inflation pressures for front
and rear tyres are those reported in the specifications table. These values
may be reduced proportionally to the permitted limits when necessary to
ensure a correct mechanical match between the front and rear wheels.

Narrow track

– at rear
Depending on the given tire size, not all of the shown track widths are
suitable for your tractor, as tire and fender may interfere. When selecting
the track width, make sure that there is adequate clearance between
fender and tire.

– at front
If you combine a narrow front axle track width with wide tires, watch out
that this does not block too much the steer angle. Check the distance
between engine hood and fenders. For this purpose, turn front wheels
against lock, then move front wheels up and down and let axle swing.

138
SECTION IV WHEELS

Width of the front axle (without

wheels)
85 - 100 HP
for tractor 4WD 1770 mm
69,7 in
X
85 - 100 HP
for tractor 2WD 1530 mm
60,2 in

Mechanical ratio (front wheel revolutions / rear wheel revolution)

40 Km/h
(24.8 mph)
85 -100 HP 1.3160

Width of rear axle (without

wheels)
85 HP 1640 mm
64,6 in X
100 HP 1740 mm
68,5 in

Row crop tires

When changing the tractor over to row crop (bar tread) tires, observe load
rating and speed limits!
Given the tremendous variety of tyres available, always ask your nearest
dealer for information on alternative tyres and data on homologation,
capacity, pressure, track, etc..

139
SECTION IV WHEELS

Running direction of tires

Tyres must always be fitted so
that the tread pattern is oriented
correctly with respect to the
direction of forward travel. In the
case of wheels where the rim is
welded to the wheel disc, the left
a n d r i g h t w h e e l s ma y b e
swapped over to alter the track
width; in all cases, however, the
V-shaped tread pattern must
always point towards the front of
the tractor, as shown in the figure
above.

Note: approved tyre combinations: in each market, only the approved

combinations for the specific zone are available.

Adjusting steering stops

After every change of the front tyres, check the steering angle.

Procedure:

A Operate parking brake

A A
A A
Additionally secure tractor against
rolling (wheel chock)
In the case of tractors with suspen-
ded front axle, disconnect front axle
suspension
Jack up tractor at its front
Turn steering wheel (to left and
right).
Adjustment of the steering angle.

When the front axle is in the condition of maximum oscillation and the
wheels are turned to the maximum steering angle, there must be no
interference between the fenders and engine hood. If necessary, adjust
the internal angle.

WARNING: ALWAYS MAINTAIN THE CORRECT TYRE PRESSURE.

WHEN INFLATING THE TYRES MAKE SURE TO STAND TO THE SIDE
OF THE CENTRAL FLANGE.

140
SECTION IV WHEELS

Adjustable track wheels

1 = Bracket
2 = Rim
3 = Bracket thickness
4 = Wheel 2

3 4

The support bracket 1 on the rim 2 is fixed offset with respect to the
centreline of the rim (and therefore with respect to the tyre too).
During fitting, the bracket can be fitted in contact with the wheel 4 on both
sides.

This allows for two different tracks.

Two more tracks can be achieved by turning the rim 2 with respect to the
wheel 1.
This means that there are in fact 4 possible ways of fitting the rim 2 and
wheel 4.

If you then fit the assembled wheel on to the hub (or rear half-axle) with the
bell facing inside or outside you can actually achieve 8 different
configurations (see the figures on pages 143 and 142 ) for distance
between the centreline of the wheel and the mating surface on the wheel
hub or half-axle flange. There are therefore 8 possible track values.

141
SECTION IV WHEELS

Permissible tyre combinations

ant. Larghezza (1) mm
Id 85HP 100HP
post. min. max
320/85R24 2024
A
420/85R30
• 1830
2043 2443
12.4R24 1876 2468
B 16.9R30 • 2067 2467
360/70R24 1899 2513
C 480/70R30 • 2105 2601
380/85R24 1933 2527
D 420/85R34 • 2043 2443
14.9R24 1932 2546
E 16.9R34 • 2165 2443
480/65R24 2037 2631
F 540/65R34 • 2280 2680
420/70R24 1973 2567
G 480/70R34 • • 2095 2631
320/85R28 1839 2473
H 340/85R38 • • 2023 2459
12.4R28 1864 2478
I 13.6R38 • • 1957 2293
380/85R24 1933 2527
L 420/85R34 • 2041 2541
14.9R24 1942 2536
M 16.9R34 • 2115 2515
480/65R24 2037 2631
N 540/65R34 • 2230 2630
340/85R28 1884 2498
O 460/85R34 • 2080 2580
13.6R28 1897 2511
P 18.4R34 • 2028 2642
360/70R28 1899 2513
Q 520/70R34 • 2144 2644
420/85R24 1973 2567
R 460/85R34 • 2080 2580
16.9R24 1997 2591
S 18.4R34 • 2106 2606
480/70R24 2037 2631
T 520/70R34 • 2144 2644
340/85R28 1884 2598
U 420/85R38 • 2033 2469
13.6R28 1884 2498
V 16.9R38 • 2033 2469
380/70R28 2029 2527
Z 480/70R38 • 2107 2501
440/65R28 2095 2595
X 540/65R38 • 2710 2698
Note: to convert mm in inch multiply by 0,0394
(1) - Width here refers to the maximum width of the tractor with minimum track setting and the
maximum width with maximum track setting.
N.B.: this value may vary according to the make of tyre and the inflation pressure.
Id:The letters A, B, C, etc. refer to the tables on pages 148 - 148.
WARNING: When driving on a public highway, do not exceed the maximum permissible
width of 2250 mm. This measurement corresponds to the outermost point on each sidelight,
plus 400 mm.

142
SECTION IV WHEELS

Track width adjustment for wheels with adjustable rims

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

Front wheels
This figure illustrates the 8 different fitting possibilities and the 8 possible
front track settings shown in the tables on the following pages.

WARNING:
TIRE CHANGING CAN BE DANGEROUS AND SHOULD BE DONE BY
TR AI N E D P E R S O N N E L U S I N G P R O P E R TO O L S AN D
P R O C E D U R E S . ALWAY S R E AD AND U N D E R S TAN D ANY
MANUFACTURER’S WARNING CONTAINED IN THEIR CUSTOMERS’
LITERATURE OR MOLDED INTO THE TIRE SIDEWALL.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN
FAULTY POSITIONING OF THE TIRE AND/OR RIM PARTS, AND
CAUSE THE ASSEMBLY TO BURST WITH EXPLOSIVE FORCE,

143
SECTION IV WHEELS

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

Rear wheels
This figure illustrates the 8 different fitting possibilities, and the 8 possible
rear track settings shown in the tables on the following pages.

WARNING: WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO WIDEN THE FRONT TREAD,

AVOID DANGEROUS OVERLOADS.

144
SECTION IV WHEELS

Note: to convert mm in inch multiply by 0,0394

A B
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear
320/85R24 420/85R30 12.4R24 16.9R30
1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1534 - 2 mm 1534 -
3 mm 1630 - 3 mm 1630 -
4 mm 1728 1604 4 mm 1728 1604
5 mm 1836 1696 5 mm 1836 1696
6 mm 1934 1798 6 mm 1934 1798
7 mm 2030 1902 7 mm 2030 1902
8 mm 2128 2004 8 mm 2128 2004

C D
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear
360/70R24 480/70R30 380/85R24 420/85R34
1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1524 - 2 mm 1534 -
3 mm 1640 1602 3 mm 1630 -
4 mm 1738 1698 4 mm 1728 1604
5 mm 1826 1802 5 mm 1836 1696
6 mm 1924 1898 6 mm 1934 1798
7 mm 2040 2002 7 mm 2030 1902
2098
8 mm 2138 8 mm 2128 2004

E F
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear
85HP 14.9R24 16.9R34 480/65R24 540/65R34
1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1524 - 2 mm 1534 -
3 mm 1640 - 3 mm 1630 -
4 mm 1738 1600 4 mm 1724 -
5 mm 1826 1704 5 mm 1836 1702
6 mm 1924 1804 6 mm 1934 1802
7 mm 2040 1900 7 mm 2030 1902
8 mm 2138 2000 8 mm 2128 2002

145
SECTION IV WHEELS

G H
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear

85HP 420/70R24 480/70R34 320/85R28 340/85R38

1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1534 - 2 mm 1524 -
3 mm 1630 - 3 mm 1640 -
4 mm 1724 1592 4 mm 1738 1584
5 mm 1836 1710 5 mm 1826 1738
6 mm 1934 1808 6 mm 1924 1836
7 mm 2030 1910 7 mm 2040 1922
8 mm 2128 2008 8 mm 2138 2020
I L
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear

12.4R28 16.9R38 100HP 380/85R24 420/85R34

1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1524 - 2 mm 1534 -
3 mm 1640 - 3 mm 1630 1602
4 mm 1738 1584 4 mm 1728 1702
5 mm 1826 1738 5 mm 1836 1802
6 mm 1924 1836 6 mm 1934 1902
7 mm 2040 1922 7 mm 2030 2002
8 mm 2138 2020 8 mm 2128 2102
M N
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear
100HP 14.9R24 16.9R34 480/65R24 540/65R34
1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1534 - 2 mm 1534 -
3 mm 1630 1602 3 mm 1630 -
4 mm 1728 1702 4 mm 1728 1652
5 mm 1836 1802 5 mm 1836 1652
6 mm 1934 1902 6 mm 1934 1856
7 mm 2030 2002 7 mm 2030 1848
8 mm 2128 2102 8 mm 2128 2052

146
SECTION IV WHEELS

O P
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear

340/85R28 460/85R34 13.6R28 18.4R34

1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1524 - 2 mm 1524 -
3 mm 1640 1602 3 mm 1640 1602
4 mm 1738 1702 4 mm 1738 1702
5 mm 1826 1802 5 mm 1826 1802
6 mm 1924 1902 6 mm 1924 1902
7 mm 2040 2002 7 mm 2040 2002
8 mm 2138 2102 8 mm 2138 2102
Q R
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear

360/70R28 520/70R34 420/85R24 460/85R34

1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1524 - 2 mm 1534 -
3 mm 1640 1602 3 mm 1630 1602
4 mm 1738 1702 4 mm 1728 1702
5 mm 1826 1802 5 mm 1836 1802
6 mm 1924 1902 6 mm 1934 1902
7 mm 2040 2002 7 mm 2030 2002
8 mm 2138 2102 8 mm 2128 2102
S T
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear
16.9R24 18.4R34 480/70R24 520/70R34
1 mm 1436 - 1 mm 1436
2 mm 1534 - 2 mm 1534
3 mm 1630 1602 3 mm 1630 1602
4 mm 1728 1702 4 mm 1728 1702
5 mm 1836 1802 5 mm 1836 1802
6 mm 1934 1902 6 mm 1934 1902
7 mm 2030 2002 7 mm 2030 2002
8 mm 2128 2102 8 mm 2128 2102

147
SECTION IV WHEELS

U V
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear

340/85R28 420/85R38 13.6R28 16.9R38

1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1524 - 2 mm 1524 -
3 mm 1640 - 3 mm 1640 -
4 mm 1738 1594 4 mm 1738 1594
5 mm 1826 1728 5 mm 1826 1728
6 mm 1924 1930 6 mm 1924 1930
7 mm 2040 1838 7 mm 2040 1838
8 mm 2138 2030 8 mm 2138 2030
Z X
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear

440/65R2,
380/70R28 480/70R38 540/65R38
8
1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm - 1604 2 mm - -
3 mm 1630 1700 3 mm 1632 -
4 mm 1728 1798 4 mm 1732 1664
5 mm 1836 1706 5 mm 1832 1840
6 mm 1934 1804 6 mm 1932 2044
7 mm 2030 1900 7 mm 2032 1860
8 mm 2128 1998 8 mm 2132 2464
G H-I
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear

100HP 420/70R24 480/70R34 100HP 320/85R28 340/85R38

1 mm - - 1 mm - -
2 mm 1534 - 2 mm 1524 -
3 mm 1630 - 3 mm 1640 -
4 mm 1724 1692 4 mm 1738 1684
5 mm 1836 1810 5 mm 1826 1838
6 mm 1934 1908 6 mm 1924 1936
7 mm 2030 2010 7 mm 2040 2022
8 mm 2128 2108 8 mm 2138 2120

148
SECTION IV WHEELS

IMPORTANT: On roads in built-up areas, statutory regulations state that

the overall width of the tractor must not exceed the measurement X+800
mm as illustrated (dimension X is the width distance measured to the
outermost points of the sidelights).

In the event that the trackwidth may have been increased for the purposes
of a specific cultivation or service task, the user must check the limit
indicated above before taking the vehicle out on the road, and reduce the
trackwidth if necessary.

If the machine is equipped with an air/hydraulic braking system, any

change of trackwidth must be made in such a way that the air reservoirs of
the braking system and the insides of the wheel rims are separated by a
clearance of no less than 3 cm on each side.

149
SECTION IV WHEELS

Front wheel track adjustment (2-W.D. Tractor)

* Swapping over the wheels increases the track width by 190 mm (7, 49 in)
with 7.50R16 - 7.50R18 - 9.00R16 tyres..

Tyres for 2-wheel drive tractors

Front Rear

7.50-16 16.9R30
7.50-16 420/85R30
7.50-20 13.6R38
7.50-20 340/85R38
9.00-16 420/85R34
9.00-16 16.9R34

150
SECTION IV WHEELS

WARNING:
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT FROM:
EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM/WHEEL ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER
MOUNTING – NEVER EXCEED 35 PSI (AIR PRESSURE) WHEN
SEATING BEADS. – ALWAYS USE SAFETY CAGE OR OTHER
RESTRAINING DEVICE AND CLIP-ON EXTENSION HOSE. ONLY
SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT TIRES.
T I R E FAI L U R E D U E TO M I S AP P L I C AT I O N / I M P R O P E R
INFLATION/OVERLOADING/EXCEEDING MAXIMUM SPEED –
FOLLOW TIRE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. CHECK
INFLATION PRESSURE FREQUENTLY WITH GAUGE.
EXPLOSION OF THE TIRE/RIM/WHEEL ASSEMBLY DUE TO
WELDING THE RIM WITHOUT FIRST REMOVING THE TIRE – NEVER
REWORK, WELD, HEAT OR BRAZE THE RIM OF A TIRE/RIM/WHEEL
ASSEMBLY.

WARNING: REINFLATION OF ANY TYPE OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY

THAT HAS BEEN OPERATED IN A RUN-FLAT OR UNDERINFLATED
CONDITION (80% OR LESS OF RECOMMENDED PRESSURE), CAN
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. THE TIRE MAY BE
DAMAGED ON THE INSIDE AND CAN EXPLODE WHILE YOU ARE
ADDING AIR. THE RIM PARTS MAY BE WORN, DAMAGED OR
DISLODGED AND CAN EXPLOSIVELY SEPARATE. NEVER REWORK,
WELD, HEAT, OR BRAZE THE TIRE/WHEEL/RIM. HEATING THE RIM
OF TIRE/WHEEL/RIM ASSEMBLY CAN CAUSE A TIRE TO EXPLODE,
CAUSING SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. THE USE OF ANY
FLAMMABLE MATERIAL DURING TIRE SERVICING IS ABSOLUTELY
PROHIBITED. USE OF STARTING FLUID, ETHER, GASOLINE OR ANY
OTHER FLAMMABLE MATERIAL TO LUBRICATE, SEAL OR SEAT
THE BEADS OF A TUBELESS TIRE CAN CAUSE THE TIRE TO
EXPLODE OR CAN CAUSE THE EXPLOSIVE SEPARATION OF THE
TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
NEVER HAMMER, STRIKE OR PRY ON ANY TYPE OF TIRE/RIM
ASSEMBLY WHILE THE TIRE CONTAINS INFLATION PRESSURE. DO
NOT ATTEMPT TO SEAT ANY PART WHILE THE TIRE CONTAINS ANY
INFLATION PRESSURE. THIS COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH.

151
SECTION IV WHEELS

WARNING:
NEVER INFLATE BEYOND 35 POUNDS OF PRESSURE TO SEAT
BEADS.
NEVER STAND, LEAN OR REACH OVER THE ASSEMBLY DURING
INFLATION.
INSPECT BOTH SIDES OF THE TIRE TO BE SURE THAT THE BEADS
ARE EVENLY SEATED. IF TIRE IS MOUNTED ON A MACHINE THAT
DOES NOT HAVE A POSITIVE LOCK-DOWN DEVICE TO HOLD THE
WHEEL, INFLATION SHOULD BE DONE IN A SAFETY CAGE OR
OTHER RESTRAINING DEVICE. IF BOTH BEADS ARE NOT
P R OP E R LY S E ATE D W H E N P R E S S U R E R E AC H E S 3 5 P S I ,
COMPLETELY DEFLATE THE ASSEMBLY, REPOSITION THE TIRE
AND/OR TUBE ON THE RIM, RELUBRICATE AND REINFLATE.
INFLATING BEYOND 35 PSI AIR PRESSURE WHEN TRYING TO SEAT
THE BEADS IS A DANGEROUS PRACTICE THAT MAY BREAK A TIRE
BEAD (OR EVEN THE RIM) WITH EXPLOSIVE FORCE, POSSIBLY
RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. AFTER THE BEADS
ARE FULLY SEATED, PRESSURE MAY BE INCREASED ABOVE 35
PSI TO OPERATING PRESSURES, NOT TO EXCEED THE MAXIMUM
MOLDED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL.

WARNING:
STAY OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AS INDICATED BY SHADED AREA.
ALWAYS USE A SAFETY CAGE OR OTHER RESTRAINING DEVICE IN
COMPLIANCE WITH OSHA REGULATIONS.
NOTE: UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, THE TRAJECTORY MAY
DEVIATE FROM ITS EXPECTED PATH

WARNING: AN UNBALANCED TRACTOR COULD OVERTURN AND

C AU S E I N J U RY OR D E AT H . M AK E S U R E F R O N T FR AM E
COUNTERWEIGHTS, WHEEL WEIGHTS AND WHEEL BALLAST ARE
USED AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DO NOT ADD
EXTRA COUNTERWEIGHTS TO COMPENSATE FOR AN
OVERLOADED TRACTOR, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO REDUCE THE
LOAD. KEEP ALL PARTS OF YOUR BODY INSIDE THE OPERATOR’S
COMPARTMENT WHILE OPERATING THE TRACTOR.

152
SECTION IV WHEELS

Ballast

Front ballast
The tractor may be equipped with 2 different types of ballast:

• ballast support with 2-8 cast iron ballast blocks (optional)

• 400 kg (881 lb) single piece ballast block (only for tractors with
front lift).

One-piece ballast block

The single piece ballast must be fitted to the front 3 point linkage as shown
in the figure above.

IMPORTANT - When working, we recommend that the ballast is raised to

the highest position (hydraulic cylinders fully retracted) so as not to alter
the position of the tractor’s centre of gravity and to ensure optimum ground
adhesion.

CAUTION: ALWAYS FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT. THE USE OF A SEAT

BELT REDUCES THE RISK OF SERIOUS INJURY IN CASE OF AN
ACCIDENT.

153
SECTION IV WHEELS

Rear ballast
ballasting by the application of metal wheel rings:
• for 30" wheels
• for 34" wheels
• for 38" wheels
Ballasting by filling the tyres with water + antifreeze solution
To prevent the water from freezing and damaging the tyres, use additives
to obtain a neutralised solution of calcium chloride.
Proceed as follows: pour the required quantity of water into a container
and then slowly pour in calcium chloride in the proportion of approx. 30 kg
(66.1 lb) to every 100 litres (26.4 U.S. gal) of water.
N.B. - Add calcium chloride to the water, not vice versa, to prevent the risk
of a violent chemical reaction.
The amount of liquid in the tyre must not exceed 75% of the total tyre

CAUTION: ON BALLASTING THE TRACTOR, VERIFY THAT THE

FRONT AXLE WEIGHT IS AT LEAST THE 20% OF THE TOTAL
TRACTOR WEIGHT. IT’S TO GUARANTEE A SAFE STEERING.

WARNING: REMEMBER THAT STEERING, BRAKING AND TRACTOR

PERFORMANCE IN GENERAL WILL BE GREATLY AFFECTED BY
THE IMPLEMENTS ATTACHED, THE TRAILERS TOWED OR THE
BALLAST APPLIED.

volume.

Warning: the antifreeze solution does not offer protection at

temperatures below -20°C (68°F).

Further information is obtainable from

the tire trade. The antifreeze is to be ad-
ded to the water under constant stirring
until it is completely dissolved. After ha-
ving filled the tires, flush all equipment
with water, as the solution is highly ag-
gressive.
The liquid must be introduced into the
tyre using a special adapter specifically
designed for this purpose.

(These adapters are supplied by

tyre manufacturers).

154
SECTION IV WHEELS

Filling the tyre with water

Jack up tractor. Rotate wheel so
that the inner-tube tire valve is in
upper position. Screw out valve 1
insert. Screw water filling valve
into the tire valve. Connect water
hose. Connect the water hose 2
and fill until the water starts to
1
come out of the breather at the
bottom of the valve. Screw off 2
water filling valve. Refit valve
insert. Inflate tire to specified
pressure.

1 - AIR
2 - WATER

CAUTION: WHILE MIXING THE ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION AND

FILLING THE TYRE, IT IS ESSENTIAL TO WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES
AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. ADD CALCIUM TO THE WATER, NOT
VICE VERSA, TO PREVENT THE RISK OF A VIOLENT CHEMICAL
REACTION.

Draining water from the tyre

Jack up tractor. Rotate wheel so
that the inner-tube tire valve
comes down. Screw out tire
valve insert. Allow water to drain.
Screw on combined valve.
Inflate tire. The air pressure will
force out any remaining water
through the bleeder bore. Screw
off combined valve. Refit tire
valve ins ert. Inflate tire to
specified pressure.

CAUTION: DURING TRACTOR REFUELING, ALWAYS TURN THE

ENGINE OFF AND CLEAN ANY FUEL SPILLED ON THE TRACTOR.

155
SECTION IV WHEELS

Hydraulic trailer braking

The tractor may be equipped with an optional hydraulic trailer braking
system.
The oil used by the system is diverted from the main hydraulic system by a
directional control valve.
This directional control valve is operated by a valve that is connected
hydraulically to the hydrostatic control of the tractor brakes.

For trailers with a safety brake, the system is equipped with a specific
directional control valve. This control valve has an ON-OFFcontrol that
allows the valve to be connected hydraulically (ON position) or excluded
(OFF position).

With the key in the ignition switch, when the control is in the OFF position,
a warning light will illuminate on the instrument panel. This same light also
illuminates to indicate insufficient pressure to operate the trailer brake.
The control valve is also connected to the handbrake, so that the trailer
brake is applied when the handbrake is operated.

N.B. - For any adjustment of the braking system, contact your authorized
service centre.

Hydraulic directional control valve for trailer braking system

1 - Hydraulic directional control valve for trailer
2 - Manual ON-OFF valve control (available only Italy version of trailer
brake valve)
156
SECTION IV WHEELS

Mixed-automatic air braking system (optional)

IMPORTANT: this device offers the facility of keeping the trailer brakes
applied when the tractor parking brake is operated with the tractor at
standstill.

An engine driven compressor delivers compressed air to the trailer air

brakes (see the drawing in the figure).

For any maintenance or adjustment operations that require specially

trained personnel, contact the system manufacturer directly.

Half-couplings for connection of trailer brake system air lines.

(Germany version)

157
SECTION IV WHEELS

Half-couplings for connection of trailer brake system air lines.

( Italy version)

Diagram of the mixed-automatic air braking system.

1- Compressor 2- Pressure regulator unit with safety valve
3- Air reservoir 4- Directional control valve
5- Couplers 6- Pressure gauge
7- Solenoid valve 8- Drain valve for draining water from air reserv.
(German version only)
A- RED coupler B- YELLOW coupler
C-BLACK coupler (German version only) for trailers with brakes that are mechanically ap-
plied and pneumatically released.

A 8 bar

6 5

B
0 - 8 bar

2 3
0 bar

8 bar
1 8 7 4

Compressed air braking system diagram.

158
SECTION IV WHEELS

When towing trailers, always fully comply with the highway code, even on
private agricultural land.

After connecting the male coupler on the trailer hose to the female coupler
on the tractor, check that there is no air leakage from the connection by
depressing the brake pedal a few times with the engine switched off.

Gauge indicating air pres-

sure internally of reservoir

Note: the trailer air reservoir will not receive air if the couplers are not
connected correctly.

After connecting the air couplers, make the electrical connection and
check that the lights work; check also that pressure gauge 6 is functioning
correctly and showing a pressure reading of 8 bar (87.0 psi) (do not drive
the tractor until the pressure in the reservoir has reached 8 bar (87.0 psi) ).

In the event of pressure loss in the control valve, it will still be possible to
operate the emergency braking system by way of the control 8 on the
tractor.

This control is normally used for trailer parking.

159
SECTION IV WHEELS

The trailer brakes must always be applied slightly in advance of the tractor
brakes.

Adjustment is by way of control valve 4; this operation is restricted to

specially trained personnel.

Check periodically:
• the condition of the hoses,
• the operation of the pressure gauge
• the tension of the compressor drive belt.
• for oil leaks from the compressor.
• that the couplers are always perfectly clean and that the valves in-
side the couplers function correctly (by checking that the air arrives
at the air reservoir on the trailer).

Every 30 operating hours, drain the water from the reservoir by

operating the drain valve 9 located at the bottom of the reservoir.

WARNING: Never unhitch the trailer without first making sure that it is
unloaded.

160
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

SECTION 5 - MAINTENANCE
OPERATIONS
This section of the manual deals with the lubrication and general
maintenance of the tractor.

CAUTION: BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATIONS, READ THE

INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL. FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS
CAREFULLY DURING OPERATION OF THE TRACTOR.

CAUTION: CAREFULLY READ ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CONTAINED IN THE OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS LISTED ON THE TRACTOR’S
DECALS.

CAUTION: ALWAYS MAINTAIN THE TRACTOR IN GOOD WORKING

CONDITION. LACK OF MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE NEEDLESS
DOWN TIME AND CAN INFLUENCE NEGATIVELY ON THE DURATION
OF ITS WORK LIFE.

WARNING: IN SOME OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS USED IN THIS

OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK, PANEL OR GUARDS MAY HAVE
BEEN REMOVED FOR CLARITY. NEVER OPERATE THE TRACTOR
WITHOUT THESE COMPONENTS IN POSITION. IF THE REMOVAL OF
PANEL OR GUARDS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE A REPAIR, THEY
MUST BE REPLACED BEFORE OPERATION.

DANGER: NEVER START THE ENGINE BY SHORT-CIRCUITING THE

STARTER ENGINE’S TERMINALS. THIS MAY CAUSE SUDDEN
TAKE-OFFS WHICH COULD BE VERY DANGEROUS TO THE
OPERATOR.

161
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

CAUTION: ALWAYS WEAR CLOTHING SUITABLE FOR THE TYPE OF

WORK TO BE PERFORMED. IF NECESSARY, USE HEARING
PROTECTION PLUGS AND WEAR EYE PROTECTION.

CAUTION: IT IS IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS HAVE FIRST-AID

EQUIPMENT READ-ILY
AVAILABLE:
- FIRST-AID KIT WITH MEDICAMENTS;
- FIRE EXTINGUISHER;
- EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBERS ON HAND (DOCTOR,
HOSPITAL, AMBULANCE, FIREMEN).

WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO CARRY OUT ANY

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ON THE TRACTOR OR AN ATTACHED
IMPLEMENT UNLESS THE ENGINE IS SWITCHED OFF, THE
GEARBOX IS IN NEUTRAL, THE PTO IS DISENGAGED, THE
HANDBRAKE IS APPLIED AND ANY ATTACHED IMPLEMENT IS
LOWERED TO THE GROUND.

DANGER: START THE ENGINE, WITH THE STARTER KEY, FROM THE
OPERATOR’S SEAT ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE
ENGINE BY SHORTING ACROSS THE STARTER TERMINALS. THE
MACHINE WILL START IN GEAR IF THE NEUTRAL START CIRCUIT IS
BYPASSED. THIS COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
ANYONE IN THE VICINITY OF THE TRACTOR. ENSURE THAT THE
ENGINE STARTER SOLENOID COVER IS ALWAYS IN POSITON.

For information regarding the quantities and qualities of lubricant and

fluids, refer to the “Prescribed lubricants and furnishments” on page 163.

162
 PRESCRIEBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS AGROFARM 85 - 100
Litres Specifications change
Part to be supplied Product hours
U.S. gal. SDFG
SECTION V

SAE 15W40 SAE 10W30

ACEA E 3-96
Engine 9** AKROS TURBO API CF SDFG OM-1991 500*
(2,3) MIL-L-2104 E level
MB 228.3 level

Main clutch, Gearbox and Rear axle, Hydraulic power- 52

Lubrificants and fluids

lift, Auxiliary system and Hydrostatic steering (13,7) SAE 10w30

AKROS MULTI FCT UTTO / API GL4 / 1200
2.5 SDFG OT1891-A
Front PTO
(0,6)

Central axle 6 (1,5) SAE 10w30

AKROS MULTI FCT UTTO / API GL4 / 1200
SDFG OT1891-A
Side reductions 1.5(0,2)x2

Brakes and clutch control MAX ATF DEXRON II D /

AKROS MATIC SDFG OF 1691

NLGI 2 50
Lubrication points AKROS GREASE T2 SDFG GR-1202 L

Radiator antifreeze 12 (3,1) 100% AKROS FREEZE SDFG EC-1599 A 1200

(*) 1° replace after 50 hours (**) With filter + 1 l. (0,26 U.S. gal)

163
MAINTENANCE
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance intervals
The recommended maintenance intervals apply to normal operating
conditions.

CAUTION: BEFORE STARTING THE TRACTOR, CHECK ITS

CONDITION FOR OPERATING SAFETLY ON THE PUBLIC HIGHWAY.

If the tractor is subjected to extreme working conditions and/or dusty

environments, the intervals between maintenance operations will have to
be reduced accordingly.

DANGER: TO AVOID EYE INJURY, NEVER EXPOSE EYES TO WAVE

EMISSION ZONES WHEN RADAR IS IN OPERATION. DO THE RADAR
MAINTENANCE ONLY AFTER ENGINE TURNED OFF AND IGNITION
KEY IN STOP POSITION.

164
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Important notes

– Ensure that any containers used to store lubricants are perfectly cle-
an. Funnels and measuring cups must be covered to prevent dust set-
tling on them.

– Clean the areas adjacent to the parts to be lubricated.

– Grease parts when warm so that the grease flows more easily.

– Clean all plugs and caps before replacing them.

– Fuel tank capacities are indicated in the table on the opposite page.

– Carry out all operations in accordance with the instructions given and
the applicable safety regulations.

– Before starting work on the tractor, make sure the engine is switched off,
the key is removed from the ignition and the handbrake is applied.
– Only work with the engine running when this is specifically indicated in
the instructions.

WARNING: BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE MAKE SURE THERE IS

PLENTY OF VENTILATION. DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE IN A
C L O S E D B U I L D I N G. T H E E X H AU S T F U M E S M AY C AU S E
ASPHYXIATION.

WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE OR OBSCURE DANGER, WARNING,

CAUTION OR INSTRUCTION DECALS. REPLACE ANY DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION OR INSTRUCTION DECALS THAT ARE NOT
READABLE OR ARE MISSING. REPLACEMENT DECALS ARE
AVAILABLE FROM YOUR DEALER IN THE EVENT OF LOSS OR
DAMAGE. THE ACTUAL LOCATION AND ORDERING CODE OF
THESE SAFETY DECALS IS ILLUSTRATED AT THE END OF THIS
SECTION. WHEN YOU REPLACE A PART THAT CARRIES A SAFETY
LABEL, MAKE SURE THAT THE SAME LABEL IS APPLIED TO THE
NEW PART. DO NOT USE FUEL OR SOLVENTS ETC. TO CLEAN
SAFETY LABELS. USE ACLEAN CLOTH DAMPED IN SOAPY WATER.

165
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and inspection schedule

* If the fuel used contains more than 0.5% of sulphur, service intervals must be halved.
** At least 2 hours after stopping the engine.

Operating hour
Delivery After
50 250 500 750 1000* 1250 1500 1750 2000
hours
1 Engine
Check engine oil level (for type of oil see table on
1.1 At the start of each workday or every 10 hours.
page. 163)
Change engine oil (at least once a year - for type of
1.2
oil see table on pag 163) • • • • •
1.3 Renew oil filter element • • • • •
1.4 Check valve clearances*** • Then every 1500 hours

1.5 Check coolant level • Periodically

1.6 Change coolant Every 2 years
1.7 Check tension of drive belts • • • • • • • • • •
1.8 Renew fuel filters • • •
1.9 Checking the pipe and hose unions (oil/diesel) At least every 2 years • •
1.10 Check that air filter is clean When the warning light illuminates
1.11 Renew air filter element Renew element at least once a year or after 6 cleaning
Replace inner safety filter after ever 3 cleanings of
1.12 Renew air filter inner safety element
the outer filter
Check cleanliness of oil coolers radiators located in
1.13
front engine compartment

2 Transmission and hydraulic system

2.1 Check transmission oil level • • • • • •
Change the oil every 1200 hours of work - or at
2.2 Change gearbox oil least once a year - for the type of oil, see the table
on page 163
For tractors without hydraulic shuttle Change the filters after 150 hours of work and
when the warning light comes on and anyhow at
2.3 Renew oil filters for gearbox - hydrostatic steering - the same time as changing the oil (1200 working
lift - control valves. hours)
For tractors with hydraulic shuttle Change the filter after 12000 hours of work and
2.4 Changing the oil filter of the gearbox in the suction when the warning light comes on and anyhow at
line for the auxiliary control valves and the lift. the same time as changing the oil

For tractors with hydraulic shuttle Change the filters after 50 and 150 hours of work
and subsequently every 300 hours of work and
2.5 Renew the circuit’s oil filter on the return line from however at the same time as changing the oil
the hydrostatic steering (1200 working hours)
Check cleanliness of the oil cooler in the front engine
2.6
compartment • • • • •
3 Front P.T.O.
3.1 Check oil level • • • • •

166
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Change the P.T.O. oil (effective P.T.O. operating ho- Change the oil at least once a year - for type of oil
3.2
urs) see table on page 163
3.3 Renew oil filter element •
3.4 Clean wire mesh filter •
4 Front axle
4.1 Check oil level differential, epicyclic reduction unit • •
4WD-Checking the oil level in the differential and
4.2
epicyclic reduction units • • • • • •
4WD- Change oil in differential and epicyclic reduc- Change the oil at least once a year - for type of
4.3
tion unit oil see table on page 163
4.4 4WD- Check oil level in hubs • • • • • •
Change the oil at least once a year - for type of
4.5 4WD- Change hub oil
oil see table on page 163
4.6 Check front wheel toe-indella carreggiata • •
5 Clutch
Check oil level in reservoir (whenever the warning
5.1 light illuminates and at the recommended intervals -
for type of oil see table on page 163 )
• • • • • •
6 Brakes
Check oil level in reservoir (whenever the warning
6.1 light illuminates and at the recommended intervals
- for type of oil see table on page 163)
• • • • • •
6.2 Check braking action • • • • • •
6.3 Check free play in brake pedals and handbrake • • • • • •
6.4 Check braking system with safety brakes valves • • • • •
7 Differential locks
7.1 Check differential locking system • • • • •
8 Hydrostatic steering
8.1 Check oil lines • • • • • •
9 Climate control system
9.1 Check cleanliness of climate control system filters • • • • •
9.2 Change refrigerant •
10 Greasing
Every 50 hours
10.1 Grease steering cylinder (2x2) •
Every 50 hours
10.2 Grease lifting rods (2) •
10.3 Grease stabiliser tie-rods (2) Every 50 hours
Every 50 hours
10.4 Grease steering joint bearings (2x2) •
Every 50 hours
10.5 Grease front support of front axle (1) •
Every 50 hours
10.6 Grease rear support of front axle (1) •
Every 50 hours
10.7 Grease rear half-shaft bearings (2) •
Every 50 hours
10.8 2WD-Greasingthe axle pivot bearings •
Every 50 hours
10.9 2WD-Greasing the steering pins •
11 Electrical system
Check system operation (lights - direction indicators -
11.1
warning lights - control units) • • • • • •
11.2 Check battery • • • • • •
12 Tightening torques
12.1 Check tightness of front and rear wheel bolts • • • • • •

167
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

CAUTION: DISCONNECT THE BATTERY CABLES, BEFORE TO

VERIFY OR REPAIR THE ELECTRICAL WIRING OR BEFORE TO
START WELDING OPERATIONS ON TRACTOR OR ON ATTACHED
IMPLEMENTS.

DANGER: MAKE SURE YOU CONNECT THE BATTERY TERMINALS

CORRECTLY. DANGER OF SHORT-CIRCUIT!

WARNING: WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN CHARGING OR

BOOSTING BATTERY.

WARNING: CONNECT ONLY TO A 12 VOLT SUPPLY TO BOOST

BATTERY.

CAUTION: IT’S IMPORTANT TO RESPECT THE ENVIROMENT AND

TO FOLLOW THE ANTI-POLLUTION RULES. ANY FLUID (OIL, FUEL,
COOLANT) OR FILTERS AND BATTERIES HAVE TO BE WASTED, BY
FOLLOWING THE LOCAL RULES.

WAR N I N G : D I E S E L E N G I N E E X H AU S T AN D S O M E OF I T S
CONSTITUENTS ARE KNOWN TO SOME STATES TO CAUSE
CANCER, BIRTH DEFECTS AND OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM.

168
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Fuel storage

DANGER: TAKE CARE NOT TO CAUSE DANGEROUS SPARKS

WHEN WORKING IN PROXIMITY TO FUEL DEPOSITS OR OTHER
FLAMMABLE MATERIAL.

The conditions of fuel storage are very important. The interiors of the
storage containers must be free of rust or any sediment, as any such
material could cause serious damage to the injection system.

Refueling

CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATATE ENGINE UNTIL FUEL TANK IS

ENPTY. IF ENGINE IS RUN OUT OF FUEL, IT WILL BECOME
NECESSARY TO BLEED AIR FROM FUEL SYSTEM.

The tractor fuel gauge indicates the exact level of fuel in the fuel tanks.

Be careful not to run out of diesel fuel when operating the tractor,
otherwise it will be necessary to bleed the air from fuel injection system.

WARNING: DO NOT FILL FUEL TANK WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING,

HOT, NEAR OPEN FLAME OR WHILE SMOKING. TRACTOR
REFUELING SHOULD BE PERFORMED WITH THE ENGINE TURNED
OFF AND IN OPEN AIR.

169
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Refueling at the end of the working day

The tractor fuel tanks should always be filled at the end of the working day.

This is to avoid
condensation forming in the
tanks overnight.

Empty space in the fuel tank

is a major cause of water in
the fuel system.

- standard fuel tank capacity

150 l (39.6 U.S. gal).

Drain plug
To drain off the diesel fuel the tank has a drain plug at the front

After draining the tank and replacing the drain plug, fill the tank and check
the condition of the drain plug seal.

170
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Raising the engine hood

Press the release button

located on the front grille to
raise the hood.

To close the hood, push

downwards until the catch
engages with the retainer. A
definite click should be felt
and heard.

Engine maintenance

Before carrying out any work on the engine, wait until it has cooled down.
During maintenance operations, apply the parking brake and position the
chock under one of the wheels.

On completion of the work, replace all guards and covers, refit the side
panels and close the hood.

Removing the side panels

The side panels can only be
removed when the hood is
raised.
1 - Grip the front of the side
panel and pull it upwards to
release it from its retaining
catch.
2 - Pull the panel towards the
front of the tractor to remove it.

171
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Right side of engine

1 - Cooling system and fan unit 5 - Fuel filter
2 - Cab pressure compressor 6 - Oil filter
3 - Engine coolant vessel 7 - Compressor
4 - Fuel prefilter-separator 8 -Engine oil cooler

Left side of engine

1 - Exhaust silencer 4 - Alternator
2 -Turbo 5 - Starter motor
3 - Oil filler 6 - General system fuses

172
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Forward engine compartment - left side

1 - Air cleaner 5 - Transmission oil cooler
2 - Engine air manifold 6 - Battery
3 - Engine radiator 7 - Power and relay fuse
4 - Fuel cooler 8 - Air cleaner pressure switch

Engine cooling fan unit

1 - Fan 3 - Alternator
2 - Engine coolant header 4 - Turbo
173
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Checking the oil level

Start the engine and allow it to run for few minutes; then switch the engine
off, wait for about one minute, and proceed to check the oil level.

Pull the dipstick out, wipe it

with a clean, lint-free cloth,
reinsert it and pull it out
once again to read the oil
level.

If the level is between the

two notches on the
dipstick, it is correct.

If necessary, top up to the

upper notch on the dipstick
with oil of the specified
grade.

Changing the engine oil

DANGER: RISK OF BURNS WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT; ALLOW THE

E N GI N E TO C OOL B E F OR E S E RV I C E , I N S P E C T I ON OR
ADJUSTMENT.

NOTE: Take care when draining oil from the engine sump, as hot oil can
cause serious burns.
Collect and store used oil in suitable containers before taking it to an
authorized collection centre.

174
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

DANGER: FLUIDS THAT ARE UNDER PRESSURE CAN PENETRATE

HUMAN TISSUE CAUSING SERIOUS INJURY. IT IS RECOMMENDED
TO ALWAYS STOP THE ENGINE AND RELIEVE THE PRESSURE
BEFORE CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING LINES.

Proceed as follows:

Unscrew the oil drain plug

located on the sump under
the filler cap.

Renew the engine oil filters following the instructions given below.

• When all the oil has drained from the sump, inspect the drain plug
seal and, if necessary, renew it before replacing the drain plug.
• Pour oil of the prescribed quality into the sump through the oil filler
until the level reaches the upper notch on the dipstick.
• Run the engine for a few minutes and check the seals around the
oil drain plug and the new oil filter.
• Check the oil level again and top up if necessary.

DANGER: TAKE CARE WHEN DRAINING OIL FROM THE ENGINE

SUMP, AS HOT OIL CAN CAUSE SERIOUS BURNS.

WARNING: COLLECT AND STORE USED OIL IN SUITABLE

CONTAI NERS BEFORE TAKING IT TO AN AUTHORIZED
COLLECTION CENTRE.

175
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Changing the engine oil filters

• Position a suitable re-
ceptacle under the fil-
ters.
• Unscrew the two filter
cartridges.
• Oil the new filter car-
tridges using the same
oil as that used in the
engine.
• Screw the new cartrid-
ges on by hand.
• On starting the engine,
check for leaks around
the cartridge seals.
• Check the engine oil
level.

Changing the engine oil filters

• Position a suitable re-
ceptacle under the fil-
ters.
• Unscrew the two filter
cartridges.
• Oil the new filter car-
tridges using the same
oil as that used in the
engine.
• Screw the new cartrid-
ges on by hand.
• On starting the engine,
check for leaks around
the cartridge seals.
• Check the engine oil
level.

NOTE: Before mounting the preliminary or fine fuel filter, ensure that it is
filled with diesel fuel.

176
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Draining water from the fuel filter

Always drain the water from the fuel filter before putting the tractor back
into service after the winter season.

Proceed as follows:

Open the drain screw on the bottom of the filter to allow fuel mixed with
water to drain out. As soon as uncontaminated fuel appears, close the the
drain screw.

WARNING: DIESEL FUEL OR HYDRAULIC FLUID UNDER PRESSURE

CAN PENETRATE THE SKIN OR EYES AND CAUSE SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY, BLINDNESS OR DEATH. FLUID LEAKS, UNDER
PRESSURE, MAY NOT BE VISIBLE. USE A PIECE OF CARDBOARD
OR WOOD TO FIND LEAKS. DO NOT USE YOUR BARE HAND. WEAR
SAFETY GOGGLES FOR EYE PROTECTION. IF ANY FLUID IS
INJECTED INTO THE SKIN, IT MUST BE SURGICALLY REMOVED
WITHIN A FEW HOURS BY A DOCTOR FAMILIAR WITH THIS TYPE OF
INJURY.

WARNING: BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE ENGINE,

WAIT UNTIL IT HAS COOLED DOWN.
DURING MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS, APPLY THE HANDBRAKE
AND POSITION THE CHOCK UNDER ONE OF THE WHEELS.
ON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, REPLACE ALL GUARDS AND
COVERS, REFIT THE SIDE PANELS AND CLOSE THE HOOD.

177
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Changing the fuel filters

• Place a suitable receptacle

under the filter.
• Unscrew the cartridge and
fit a new original replace-
ment of the same type.
• Check that the seal betwe-
en the new cartridge and
the cover is perfect.
– OFF - direction of rotation to
unscrew cartridge
– ON - direction of rotation to
tighten cartridge
• Proceed as follows:
• Place a suitable receptacle
under the filter.
• Undo the screw collar A (direction of OFF arrow) until the filter car-
tridge can be removed completely;
• Offer the new cartridge and the screw collar A (direction of ON ar-
row) until fully tight

Bleeding air from the fuel system

This operation must be carried out when air has entered the fuel circuits as
a result of the disassembly of fuel system components, running out of fuel
or leaks around fuel line fittings.

When air is in the fuel system, the engine either fails to start completely or
stops once it has started.

WARNING on no account loosen the unions of the fuel lines connecting

the pumps and the injectors, as these need to be retightened to a specific
torque setting against the special copper seals, which must be renewed
whenever the fittings are disconnected.

WARNING: THE SHOCK ADSORBERS HAVE INSIDE GAS OR OIL

UNDER PRESSURE. BEFORE ANY REPAIR OPERATION, READ
CAREFULLY THE WORKSHOP MANUAL OF THE MAKER.

178
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

To bleed the system of air, loosen the plug B and operate the pump A,
depressing the knob repeatedly until fuel emerges devoid of air bubbles at
the bottom of the plug B.
Retighten the plug B.
Loosen the screw C located on top of the fuel filter and operate the pump A
until fuel emerges devoid of air bubbles; retighten the screw C.

179
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Fuel feed circuit bleed pump

The pump is operated

manually by depressing
the knob repeatedly as
indicated by the arrow.

The pump is fitted to the

filter/separator head.

WARNING: « PAPER» FILTER IS NOT S UITABLE FOR THE

TREATMENT OF PESTICIDES AND SO MUST BE REPLACED BY AN
«ACTIVE CARBON» FILTER AVAILABLE OPTIONALLY. ONCE THE
PESTICIDE TREATMENT IS FINISHED, IT IS NECESSARY TO ONCE
AGAIN REPLACE THE “ACTIVE CARBON” FILTER WITH THE PAPER
FILTER, SINCE THIS IS THE ONLY TYPE SUITED FOR FILTERING
FOREIGN PARTICLES FROM THE AIR.

WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR LIGHT MATCHES WHEN SERVICING

OR BLEEDING FUEL SYSTEM.

DANGER: WHEN HANDLING BATTERIES:

- AVOID BREATHING IN FUMES P RODUCED BY THE ACID
SOLUTION (if the acid is accidentally swallowed, drink plenty of wa-
ter or milk, then drink beaten eggs or vegetal oil; seek medical atten-
tion immediately)
- USE THE APPROPRIATE PROCEDURE WHEN CHARGING
- CLEAN ALL PARTS WHERE ACID SOLUTION MIGHT HAVE
SPILLED. IF IT SPILLS ON THE HANDS, NEUTRALIZE IT WITH
HYDRATED LIME OR SODIUM BICARBONATE. IF IT HITS THE EYES,
RINSE REPEATEDLY FOR 10-15 MINUTES, THEN SEEK MEDICAL
ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.

Fuel
We recommend that you use only commercial brands of diesel fuel which
have a sulphur content of 0.5% or less.

If you use a fuel with a sulphur content that exceeds 0.5%, the oil change
intervals indicated in this manual must be halved.

180
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Air filter
Intake air is filtered through a pleated paper element with a protective
case, contained in a cylindrical plastic housing.

WARNING: the internal cartridge of the filter does not perform any
filtration function. Its function is to prevent solid particles from entering the
inlet manifold when the filter cartridge is removed. The inner safety
element should never be cleaned but only replaced every three cleanings
of the main cartridge.

Periodically: check the efficiency of the air filter dust exhausting valve.

Front engine compartment - right-hand side

NOTE: Check regularly that the engine air cleaner casing and element are
not damaged. Do not wash or brush the element.

NOTE: Periodically inspect air cleaner housing and element.

NOTE: The small inner secondary safety filter must never be used without
the larger outer primary filter being in place. The purpose of the secondary
safety filter is to serve as a backup to the primary and prevent dust or other
items from entering while the primary is being cleaned or replaced.

181
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Air cleaner servicing instructions

Pull out the slide clip retaining the cover of the

filter.

Disconnect the dust unloader pipe by pulling

downwards.

Turn the cover of the filter anticlockwise to

release.

Remove the cover from the filter housing

Pull out the main paper element

182
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

If necessary (only after the main element has

been cleaned 3 times), remove the safety
element and fit a replacement.

This element must never be cleaned, only

renewed:

Refit the elements in the housing, repeating

the sequence of operations described above
in reverse order.

Refit the filter cover and secure the clip.

The operations of fastening and releasing the filter cover are illustrated by
symbols on the cover itself.
NOTE: Never use gasoline (petrol), kerosene or cleaning solvents to clean
the element.
- do not attempt to blow the main element clean using tractor exhaust gases.
- never add oil to the dry air filter element.
- filter must be serviced when warning indicator pilot light comes on,
otherwise engine could lose power and damage to engine could occur.
- never use a filter that shows sign of damage.
If in doubt, replace the filter.

183
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Cleaning the air filter

Clean the filtering element whenever the air filter warning light
comes on.

Important
It is important to make sure that the warning light is always working
correctly. To check its operation, start the engine and temporarily obstruct
the air filter intake tube (do not use your hands). The filtering element must
always be in perfect working order; if not, clean, wash or replace it.

Cleaning the filter using compressed air

This is the correct cleaning method to use when the filter is clogged with
dust. Direct a jet of compressed air (max. pressure 6.8 bar/98 psi) from the
inside to the outside of the element, moving the jet along the pleats in the
paper until all the dust is removed.

Washing the filter element in water

This cleaning method is particularly recommended when the the filter
element is clogged with oil substances. Wash the element using a jet of
clean water (max. pressure 2.9 bar/42 psi) directed from the inside to the
outside of the element. Leave the element to dry in a dust free
environment for 24 hours.

Refitting the element

Wipe out the air filter casing with a dry rag, and check that the element is
not deformed. Hold a light inside the paper element to check for tears or
holes in the paper fabric.
The filter element must be replaced after being cleaned 6 times, unless
any small holes or tears are detected sooner, in which case it must be
renewed immediately.
The inner safety element must never be cleaned. It must, however, be
replaced after the main element has been cleaned 3 times.

184
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

7188-33
Washing the filter element

Cleaning the filter element using

compressed air

7188-34

Eliminating any residue from the

element using a water jet

7188-35

Inspecting the paper element for holes

or tears using a light.

7188-36

185
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Engine cooling system

Checking the level of coolant in the expansion tank

WARNING: LIQUID COOLING SYSTEMS BUILD UP PRESSURE AS

THE ENGINE GETS HOT. BEFORE REMOVING THE RADIATOR CAP,
STOP THE ENGINE AND LET THE SYSTEM COOL.
CHECK THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM AND ADD COOLANT AS
REQUIRED.

We recommend the use of

liquid coolant AKROS
FREEZE at 45% and water
at 55%.

controlled by way of the radiator cap which should never be removed

when the engine is hot.
Excess pressure is removed by turning the radiator cap to the first position
and then removing it completely.

AKROS FREEZE liquid coolant

Coolant/antifreeze mixture.
This mixture, in addition to preventing freezing at temperatures down to
-38°C (-36.4°F), offers protection against oxidisation, corrosion, foaming
and encrustation.

The quantity of coolant and antifreeze mixture contained in the cooling

system is 12 litres (3,1 U.S. gal) .

WARNING: ALWAYS USE THE 100% OF PERMANENT TYPE

ANTI-FREEZE “AKROS FREEZE” AVAILABLE FROM YOUR
DEALER, NEVER THE ALCOHOL TYPE ANTI-FREEZE.

186
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Changing the coolant/antifreeze mixture and flushing the cooling

system
Clean the cooling system using a specific detergent.

Proceed as follows:
– Drain the cooling circuit
by opening the drain tap
on the left-hand side of
the engine;
– Empty the radiator by
removing the drain plug 1
on the bottom left-hand
side;
– Fill the system with the
detergent solution (if the
tractor is equipped with a
cab heater, this should
be on the maximum heat
setting so that the
detergent solution can
also circulate through the
heater radiator);

– Drain the system and

then fill it with water; then start the engine again, bring it up to a speed
of approx. 1000 rpm and leave it running for 5 minutes.

– Drain the system once again.

– Refill with AKROS FREEZE, run the engine for a few minutes and then
top up the system.

Thermostat
There are two thermostats in the cooling system that prevent the
coolant from circulating in the radiator until it has reached a sufficiently
high temperature (approx. 85°C/185°F).
If you are in any doubt as to whether a thermostat is functioning correctly,
have it checked by qualified personnel.

187
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Cleaning the engine radiator

The radiator can be cleaned by blasting with compressed air, or if
necessary, jetting with steam (max. pressure 6 bar) or water.

When cleaning the radiator, it will also be advantageous to clean the

transmission oil cooler (see instructions on page 190) and the fuel cooler
(see instructions on page 189) at the same time; thereafter, proceed to
clean the screen positioned in front of the radiator and coolers (see
instructions on page 191).

Should it be necessary to clean the engine itself, be certain to protect the

air cleaner, the alternator and the starter motor.

Once all components have been refitted, run the engine for a few minutes
so that the heat generated will dry any parts that may be wet.

After cleaning the radiator

Cleaning with detergents

If you use detergents to clean the oil cooler, use commercial products that
dissolve oil.
The detegrent can be mixed with water for application by spray gun or
brush.
After applying the solution, wait after few minutes, then rinse off with clean
water.

Cleaning with compressed air

This operation is only suitable for removing dust. When cleaning the grilles
or cab filter screens, make sure that the compressed air jet is directed in
the opposite direction to the normal air flow.

Important: failure to keep the oil cooler clean can lead to overheating of
the lubricated parts.

Warning: every time you clean the tractor, observe the applicable
regulations for environmental protection.

WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE RADIATOR CAP WHILE ENGINE IS

HOT. RADIATOR IS PRESSURIZED AND IF OPENED WHILE HOT,
STEAM AND BOILING LIQUID WILL BE SPRAYED OUT, WHICH MAY
INJURY YOU AND OTHERS WHICH MAY BE CLOSE BY. THERE CAN
ALSO BE A EXCESSIVE AMOUNT OF COOLANT LOSS.

188
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of fuel coolers

The fuel cooler is positioned high up on the engine, forward of the coolant
radiator.

The fuel cooler can be cleaned by blasting with compressed air, or if

necessary, jetting with steam (max. pressure 6 bar) or water.

WARNING: AN UNBALANCED TRACTOR COULD OVERTURN AND

C AU S E I N JU RY OR D E AT H . M AK E S U R E F R O N T FR AM E
COUNTERWEIGHTS, WHEEL WEIGHTS AND WHEEL BALLAST ARE
USED AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DO NOT ADD
EXTRA COUNTERWEIGHTS TO COMPENSATE FOR AN
OVERLOADED TRACTOR, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO REDUCE THE
LOAD. KEEP ALL PARTS OF YOUR BODY INSIDE THE OPERATOR’S
COMPARTMENT WHILE OPERATING THE TRACTOR.

WARNING: FLUIDS THAT FACILITATE ENGINE STARTING ARE

HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. WHEN USING THEM, KEEP AWAY FROM
SPARK SOURCES (BATTERIES, CONNECTORS, ETC). THESE
FLUIDS SHOULD BE KEPT IN COOL AREAS AND THE CONTAINERS
PROPERLY STORED.

189
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Servicing the transmission oil cooler

The transmission oil cooler also serves the hydraulic services, and is
located forward of the engine coolant radiator.

The fuel cooler can be cleaned by blasting with compressed air, or if

necessary, jetting with steam (max. pressure 6 bar) or water.

CAUTION: INSPECT THE DRIVE BELTS OVER THEIR ENTIRE

LENGTH. IF DAMAGED OR CRACKED, RENEW IMMEDIATELY.

190
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Cleaning the front screen

For the engine to be cooled efficiently, the screen positioned in front of the
radiator must always be kept properly clean.
The screen must be cleaned after servicing the radiator and coolers.

To remove the screen, simply grip the handle and pull upwards. The
screen is cleaned by blasting with compressed air and, if necessary,
jetting with steam (max. pressure 6 bar) or water.

CAUTION: WITH A COLD ENGINE YOU MAY NOTICE ABNORMAL

COMBUSTION. THIS SHOULD CLEAR UP ONCE THE ENGINE HAS
REACHED NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE.

WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH THE ENGINE OFF BEFORE CARRYING

OUT ANY MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS. FOR ADDITIONAL SAFETY,
REMOVE THE KEY FROM THE IGNITION.

191
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Adjusting the tension of the drive belts

To set the correct tension of the belts, turn the bolts indicated in the
illustrations one way or the other so that when pressure is applied at
mid-point on the longest branch with the thumb, the resulting slack will
give a deflection of 15 mm.

Fan on tractors without air

conditioning system
Loosen the bolt 1, release the
lock nut 2 and adjust the
tension by turning the hex
socket screw 3.
Retighten the bolt 1 and
secure the nut 2.

Fan on tractors with air

conditioning system
Loosen the bolt 1, and adjust
the tension by turning the hex
socket screw 3.
Retighten the bolt 1.

Fuel lift pump and generator

Loosen the bolts 1 and 2 and
tension the belt by
repositioning the fuel lift pump.
Retighten the bolts

192
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Clutch maintenance
For 85 - 100HP Standard models
The hydrostatic clutch control
system eliminates any need for
clutch pedal adjustment.
The level of fluid in the brake fluid
reservoir is monitored by a warning
light on the instrument panel.
If the warning light illuminates,
remove the filler cap and add fluid to
bring the level up to the MAX mark.
Important: the same fluid reservoir is
also used by the braking system.

In case of clutch malfunction,

contact a DEUTZ-FAHR approved service centre.

Bleeding air from the hydraulic clutch circuit

If clutch does not work properly, consult one of our Service Centres or
check whether there is air within the hydraulic circuit by proceeding as
follows:
– After removing the dust cap, loosen the bleed screw, slowly depress then
hold down the clutch pedal and immediately tighten the bleed screw A.
– Release the pedal.
– This operation should be repeated until the oil flows out of the blee-
ding valve without any air bubbles.

193
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of the gearbox, differential and rear reduc-

tion units
For 85 - 100HP Standard models
Every 150 hours: check the oil level by inspecting the plug and dipstick
located at the rear of the gearbox.

Every 1200 hours: oil change.

The tractor is equipped with three identical 25 micron filters:

– One filter 1 is installed on the oil line supplying the hydrostatic power
steering unit, located
– on the inlet side of the hydraulic pump. Oil returning from the steering
system supplies the electrohydraulic valves and lubricates the
transmission.
– The other filters 2 are installed on the oil line supplying the auxiliary
spool valves, located on the inlet side of the hydraulic pump. The oil
supplying the auxiliary spool valves is also used by the rear lift.

The three filters are located on the left hand side of the tractor and have
interchangeable cartridges.

Underside view of the gearbox

1 - Hydrostatic steering oil filter, electro-hydraulic and gearbox lubrication
2 - Hydraulic lift oil filters and hydraulic control valves

CAUTION: IF THE BELT IS BROKEN DO NOT RUN THE ENGINE AS

THE COOLING FAN IS INOPERATIVE.

194
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

WARNING: When the filter clogged warning light , comes on, renew
the oil filters ref. 2 page 194 immediately and renew the 10 micron filter of
the hydraulic shuttle circuit if the tractor has one.

N.B. If warning light continues to stay on after changing filter(s),

contact a authorized service centre. It is normal for the light to stay
on for a few minutes immediately after starting the engine.

Procedure for changing the transmission oil filters

– Position a suitable receptacle underneath the filter.
– Unscrew the cartridge.
– Oil the new cartridge using the same oil as that used in the transmis-
sion.
– Screw on cartridge, tightening by hand only.
– On starting the engine, check for leaks around the cartridge sealing ring.
– Check the transmission oil level.

Gearbox oil drain plug

WARNING: HYDRAULIC FLUID UNDER PRESSURE CAN PENTRATE

THE SKIN OR EYES AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY, BLINDNESS OR
DEATH. FLUID LEAKS UNDER PRESSURE, MAY NOT BE VISIBLE.
LOOSEN CONNECTIONS SLOWLY, KEEPING HANDS AND FINGERS
CLEAR OF LOOSENED FITTINGS. USE A PIECE OF CARDBOARD OR
WOOD TO LOCATE LEAKS, DO NOT USE YOUR FINGERS OR
HANDS. WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES FOR EYE PROTECTION. IF ANY
FULID IS INJECTED INTO THE SKIN, SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION
IMMEDIATELY.

195
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of the gearbox, differential and rear reduc-

tion units
For 85 - 100 tractors with hydraulic shuttle

Every 150 hours: check the oil level by inspecting the plug and dipstick
located at the rear of the gearbox.
Every 1200 hours: oil change.

The tractor has a 25 micron filter 1 installed on the return line from the
power steering, located on the right hand side of the machine and
equipped with an interchangeable cartridge.
For the tractor to function correctly, the filter must be changed:
• after the first 50 hours operation
• after the first 150 hours operation
• every 300 hours operation thereafter.
The filter should in any event be changed if the warning indicator on the
instrument panel stays alight with the engine running at normal speed and
the oil at working temperature.
It is quite normal for the warning light to remain on for a few minutes after
starting the engine.

Right-hand side view of gearbox on tractors with hydraulic shuttle.

1 - Hydrostatic steering oil filter
2 - Damper

196
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

WARNING: when the filter clogged warning light , comes on, change
the oil filters.

Procedure for changing the transmission oil filters

• Position a suitable receptacle under the filters.

• Unscrew the two filter cartridges.
• Oil the new filter cartridges using the same oil as that used in the
engine.
• Screw the new cartridges on by hand.
• On starting the engine, check for leaks around the cartridge seals.
• Check the engine oil level.

Transmission oil filter located on the inlet circuit

There is also a second filter rated 160 micron (indicated by numeral 2 in
the picture below), located on the right hand side of the machine,
positioned internally of the gearbox and connected to the oil inlet line (see
picture on the next page).

The filter should be changed every 1200 hours operation at the same
time as the transmission oil is changed, and cleaned only if the warning
light appears on the instrument panel. In this instance, the gearbox must
first be drained to allow removal of the filter.

NOTE: If noises occur in hydraulic pumps at operating temperature, a dirty

oil filter could be the cause. in this case change the oil filter for the operating
hydraulics immediately.

197
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

To access the filter on tractors with hydraulic shuttle, the two screws 2
securing the cover of the filter 1 must first be removed so that the cartridge
can be drawn out.

WARNING: when the clogging indicator lights up, the oil filter must be
replaced immediately.

1 - Filter retaining cover

2 - Cover retaining screw.

NOTE: When working on steep gradients, take care to ensure that all moving
parts receive adequate lubrication.

198
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Checking the oil level

For 85/100 hp models
• The tractor must be parked on level ground.
• The engine must be switched off at least 5 minutes beforehand
and the parking brake applied.
• The rear lift links must be lowered and the arms of the front lift (if
installed) must be raised.
• The control levers of the hydraulic spool valves must be in the neu-
tral position.
– The oil level is checked
in a few moments by
inspecting the dipstick
1. Wipe the dipstick
clean with a lint-free
cloth, reinsert, then pull
out and inspect. The
correct level is between
the two notches. In
addition, the dipstick
should be removed and
replaced slowly.
– If necessary, top up
with oil of the specified
grade, adding until the
level is at the upper
notch on the dipstick.
– Restart and run the engine for a few minutes, then check the oil level
again.

Top up the level again if necessary, then replace the filler plug and
dipstick.

Oil filler plug 85HP Oil filler plug 100HP

199
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Changing the oil

When changing the oil, replace the filters as well.
To change the oil, proceed as follows:
– Remove the cover of the lift unit and unscrew the oil level tube.
– Position a receptacle beneath the drain plug C on the gearbox, then
remove the plug and drain the oil.
– Remove the plug with the dipstick A.
– Replace the oil filters on the left hand side of the gearbox (follow the in-
structions on pages 194 - 196 - 197)
– Refit and tighten the drain plug C, then remove the plug from the hole
B at the top of the lift housing and proceed to pour in fresh transmis-
sion oil (71 litres approx - 18,74 U.S. Gal) filling until the level is up to
the Max mark on the dipstick A.
– With refilling completed, run the engine for a few minutes.
– Check the oil level again by inspecting the dipstick A, and top up if ne-
cessary.

NOTE: the transmission oil level must always be checked the rear lift
and the front lift (if installed) must be fully DOWN.

Warning: take care when draining spent oil, which if still hot could cause
burns.

Spent oil must be collected and stored in suitable containers, and taken
ultimately to an approved collection centre.

200
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of the rear axle

Greasing
The halfshaft bearings (one per side, as shown in the figure) must be
greased at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Inject grease through the

nipples using a grease
pump.

Maintenance of the hydrostatic power steering

Inspect the pipes for cracks or breaks and check for leaks around the pipe
fittings and the control valve.

On illumination of the filter restriction warning light : renew filter

following the instructions on pages 194 - 196.

WARNING: KEEP THE TRACTOR LOCKED, USING A CHOCK, WHEN

PARKING ON SLEEP GROUND, REPAIRING OR MAINTENANCE
OPERATING.

201
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Bleeding air from the hydraulic system

When necessary, bleed the
air from the steering system
by loosening the two fittings
on the steering cylinder and
then turning the steering
wheel in both directions (with
the engine running) until the
oil flowing from the fittings is
free of air bubbles.
Re-tighten the fittings and
top up the transmission oil
through the filler on the
right-hand side at the rear of
the transmission casing.

N.B. - even just a few minutes operation without oil can cause the pump to
seize.

WARNING: FOR THE WHEELS REPLACEMENT AND FOR SOME

MAINTAINING OR REPAIRING OPERATIONS, THE TRACTOR MUST
LIFTED, USING SPECIFIC SAFETY SUPPORTS. NEVER USE AS
SUPPORT THE IMPLEMENTS ATTACHED TO THE TRACTOR. DO
NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO GET ON THE TRACTOR, WHEN LIFTED
FROM THE GROUND FOR M AI NTENANCE OR REPAIR
OPERATIONS.

Greasing the steering cylinders

Inject grease using a grease

pump through the grease
nipples (two per cylinder)
located on the cylinder pivot
pins.

202
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Front axle 2wd

Axle oscillation bushings

Inject grease using a
grease pump.

Hub reduction units

Every 1200 hours :
disassemble the bearings
and wash them with diesel
f u e l , th e n r e a s s e m b l e
them, half-filling each hub
with grease.

Steering knuckle pins

Every 50 hours: carry out
greasing.
Inject grease using a
grease pump.

Steering cylinders
Inject grease using a
grease pump through the
grease nipples (two per
cylinder) located on the
cylinder pivot pins.

WARNING: FOR WHEELS DISASSEMBLING AND FOR

MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR, LIFT THE TRACTOR, USING SPECIFIC
TOOLS ONLY.

203
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of the front driving axle

Differential

Checking the oil level

Remove the oil filler/level
plug to check the oil level.

Changing the oil

Drain the oil from drain hole
located under the centre of
the front axle

and fill through the hole on

the right-hand side until the
oil level is up to the lower
edge of the hole.

WARNING: BATTERY POSTS, TERMINALS AND RELATED

AC C E S S O R I E S C O N TAI N L E AD AN D LE AD C O M P O U N D S ,
CHEMICALS KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE
CANCER AND BIRTH DEFECTS OR OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM.
WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.

204
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Hub reduction units

Checking the oil level

Rotate the hub so that
filler/level plug is aligned
horizontallly with the centre of
the hub, and remove the
plug.
The oil level should be up to
the lower edge of the hole.

Changing the oil

Drain the used oil from the
drain hole located at the
bottom of the hub.

Fill through the filler/level

hole until the oil level is up
to the lower edge of the
hole.

Important: collect used oil

in suitable containers prior
to taking it to an authorized
disposal centre.

205
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Greasing

Inject grease using a grease pump through the grease nipples (2 per hub)
located on the hub pivot pins.

Front axle oscillation bushings

Greasing

Inject grease through the two grease nipples using a grease pump.

Checking operation of the differential lock controls

Operate the controls and check that the differential lock is engaged and
disengaged correctly; tests should be made with the differential system
both activated and deactivated.

206
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of the front and rear brakes

The hydrostatic brake control system does away with any need to adjust
the positions of the brake pedals.

Checking the braking action

The user should operate the brakes to test the braking action. If the brakes
do not function correctly, contact your authorized service centre.

Bleeding air from the hydraulic braking system (to be carried out in the
workshop)
In the case of poor braking action, either contact an authorized service
centre or check for air in the hydraulic circuit as follows:

• separate the two bra-

ke pedals by deta-
ching the connecting
bolt

• Set the “SEPARATE

BRAKES” valve con-
trol to OFF position.

CAUTION: APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE AFTER THE ENGINE HAS

STOPPED AND BEFORE LEAVING THE TRACTOR.

207
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

• operate the right-hand

brake pedal several ti-
mes in quick succes-
sion;

• then, keeping the pedal

fully depressed, slightly
unscrew and immedia-
tely re-close the air ble-
ed screw for the rear
right-hand brake.
Repeat this operation
as many times as ne-
cessary until clean
hydraulic fluid, free of
any air bubbles, can
be seen flowing out of
the bleed screw.

• Repeat this procedure

on the bleed screw for
the front right-hand
brake.

• Repeat the procedure on the bleed screws for left-hand front and
rear brakes.

CAUTION: ALL IMPLEMENTS MOUNTED TO THE TRACTOR MUST

BE SAFELY ATTACHED.

208
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

The level of fluid in the brake fluid

reservoir is indicated by a warning
light on the instrument panel

; if the low brake fluid level

warning light illuminates, remove

the filler cap and add fluid to bring
the level up to the MAX mark.

Caution! On tractors without

hydraulic shuttle, the same oil
tank also serves the clutch.

Wa rning: w h e n d r i v i n g th e
tractor on roads, insert the connecting bolt to lock the two brake pedals
together.

CAUTION: INSPECT PERIODICALLY THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL IN

THE TANK. THE BRAKE FLUID TANK MUST BE ALWAYS FULL.

Front axle right-hand side (with front brakes)

1 - Front axle
2 - Oil pipe for front brakes
3 - Air bleed screw, brake circuit
4 - Oil drain plug, brake housing

209
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Adjusting the parking brake

When correctly set, the parking brake lever A should allow full travel of 150
mm/5,9 in; if this is not the case, contact an approved service centre to
have the linkage rod adjusted.

IMPORTANT: If it is necessary
to park the tractor on steep
g r o u n d - ov e r 1 5 ° ( 3 3 %
gradient) - put wedges under
the rear wheels to block the
tractor.
It is anyhow recommended
not to park the tractor on a
steep gradient.

Maintenance of the 3-point linkage

Rear 3-point linkage
Furthermore, the two lifting rods and the stabiliser tie-rods must be
greased at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

NOTE: When adjusting the length of the top link of the 3-point hitch, take
care that it does not come apart and ensure that a sufficient length of the
threaded end of the turnbuckle is screwed into the turnbuckle housing to
withstand the tractive force applied when working.

WARNING: THE IMPLEMENTS MUST ALWAYS BE LOWERED TO THE

GROUND WHENEVER THE TRACTOR IS NOT OPERATING OR WHEN
ADJUSTMENT, MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OPERATIONS ARE TO
BE CARRIED OUT.

210
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Greasing - Inject grease at the grease nipples using a grease pump.

Grease nipples of lower lift arm shaft.

211
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Rear hydraulic lift

1 - Reservoirs (two, one on each side) for the collection of oil-drip from external
pressure lines.
The oil collected can be transferred to the gearbox, but only after filtering thoro-
ughly to remove any impurities.
View of three-point linkage

212
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of the front P.T.O.

Checking the oil level (see the figure on the next page)
Check the oil level by way of the level plug C located on the front left of the
P.T.O. case.

If necessary, top up through the filler hole A located on top of the P.T.O. case.

Changing the oil

(See picture page 214)
• Position a suitable receptacle under the drain hole.
• To drain the oil, remove drain plug D located on the undeside of
the front P.T.O. case (to access the drain plug, first remove the co-
ver located under the front P.T.O.).
• Remove the wire mesh filter E, wash it thoroughly in diesel fuel
and then dry it with compressed air.
• Replace wire mesh filter E.
• Unscrew filter cartridge B and fit a new cartridge; apply oil of the
same type as that used in the P.T.O. to the new cartridge before fit-
ting it.
• Replace drain plug D and fill the P.T.O. case with oil up to the level
marked on level plug C.
• Replace filler plug A.

DANGER: THE DRIVEN IMPLEMENTS COULD ROTATE FOR SOME

TIME AFTER P.T.O. HAS BEEN DISENGAGED. PLEASE STOP THE
TRACTOR ENGINE AND WAIT UNTIL ALL THE MOVING PARTS OF
IMPLEMENT HAVE COME TO A COMPLETE STANDSTILL, BEFORE
TO START ANY SERVICING OPERATION.

DANGER: BEFORE DOING ANY JOB ON THE P.T.O. DRIVE LINE AND
P.T.O. END SHAFT, ENSURE THAT PTO IS DISENGAGED, THE
ENGINE SHUT OFF AND THE KEY REMOVED.

213
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Front P.T.O.

A - Oil filler plug.

B - P.T.O. oil filter cartridge.

(wire mesh filter to be cleaned whenever operating irregularities are noted
and to be renewed every 2400 hours).

C - Oil level indicator plug.

Is positioned on the right side of the box of the P.T.O.

D - Oil drain plug.

To access, remove the cover located under the front carrier

E - Filter, wire mesh.

DANGER: DO NOT CONNECT, DISCONNECT OR ADJUST PTO WITH

THE ENGINE RUNNING.

214
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Windscreen washer
C h e c k th e l e v e l o f
windscreen washer fluid in
the plastic reservoir
located at the rear of the
tractor.

1 - Screen washer bottle

2 - Pump
3 - Tank collecting oil from
the hydraulic control valve
lines

Clean plugged windscreen washer jets using a pin. Adjust the direction of
the jets so that the spray hits the windscreen at the top of the arc described
by the wiper blade.

During winter, it is advisable to add a suitable antifreeze or methyl alcohol

to the windscreen washer fluid.

IMPORTANT: Always keep all the cab windows clean. Mirrors must also
be kept clean and correctly positioned.

Windscreen and rear screen wipers

The wiper blades have a bayonet fitting. To remove the blade, raise the tab
of the centre clip.

CAUTION: REPAIRS TO THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM MUST

ONLY BE CARRIED OUT BY A SPECIALIZED SERVICE CENTRE.

215
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of the climate control system

WARNING: system servicing requirements do not vary according to the
type of cab roof (standard roof or high-visibility roof)

Tractors with standard cab roof

Cab air filter (cleaning)

Periodically (according to the operating conditions): clean filter.

To gain access to the filter, lower the protective grille, release the two filter
clamp knobs, and remove.

Cab air filter

1 - Air filter
2 - Protective grating

Filter cleaning is performed as follows:

• Direct a jet of compressed air (max. 6 bar (87 psi)) in the direction
opposite that of the filtering action until the dust is completely re-
moved;
• Wash the filter with a water and detergent solution at 40°C (104°F)
for about 15 minutes;
• Rinse with running water;
• Let it dry at room temperature.

216
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANT: The filter must be replaced when damaged and in any case
after 6 cleanings.

Before using the system, make sure that the air intakes and outlet vents
are not obstructed.

Control and recirculation inlets air conditioning system.

DANGER: SHOULD THE SYSTEM DEVELOP A VISIBLE LEAK , DO

NOT APPROACH WITH A NAKED FLAME. REFRIGERANT GAS IS
FLAMMABLE AND ON COMBUSTION PRODUCES HIGHLY TOXIC
SUBSTANCES.

217
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

DANGER: REPLACE THE “ACTIVE CARBON” FILTER AFTER 200

WORKING HOURS OR AFTER 36 MONTHS. IF YOU NOTICE SMELL
OF PESTICIDE INSIDE THE CAB, REPLACE IMMEDIATELY THE
FILTER AND LET CHECKED THE CAB GASKETS.

DANGER: WHILE MIXING THE ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION AND

FILLING THE TYRE, IT IS ESSENTIAL TO WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES
AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. STAY CLEAR OF RAISED BOOM AND
BUCKET

218
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of the heating system

The heating system utilises heat from the engine cooling system

Every 1200 hours (or every 2 years): flush out the heating system along
with the engine cooling system when the AKROS FREEZE 38 coolant is
changed.

During this operation the tap located on the right of the dashboard must be
open, i.e. control knob turned fully clockwise.

Each season, check the supply and return lines for leaks,

Check belt tension: when firm thumb pressure is applied in the mid point
between the two pulleys, the belt should deflect 5 to 8 mm (0,197 to 0,315
in) at most.

In case of system operation failure or interruption, check the system fuse.

If the air does not start coming out of the outles right away as soon as the
system is set at work, immediately switch it off and identify the fault.

When switching on the system, always make sure the air intake ducts and
the diffusers are not blocked.

Never turn on the heating system in dusty environments when the doors
are open.

IMPORTANT: Never attempt to carry out any work on the heating system
with running engine.

219
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Maintenance of the air conditioning system

The system is made up of three units:
Fan-evaporator unit, placed under the cab ceiling;
Power supply unit, consisting of a motor-driven compressor.
Condenser and fan unit mounted on cab roof.

Every 50 hours: inspect radiator-condenser unit. After removing the

protection grating, check if the radiator is dirty or clogged.
Carry out a careful cleaning, if necessary.

N.B. - Should the pipes of the air conditioning circuit come loose, the
system has to be recharged using special equipment. Have the system
recharged by a specialized repair shop.

For further repairs on the heating and conditioning systems consult one of
our Service Centres.

Checking the air conditioning system

• (To be performed at the beginning of each working year by a spe-
cialized workshop)

The presence of air and water in the system could jeopardize its efficiency:
the air is uselessly compressed by the compressor and no cooling effect is
produced.

the moisture has a tendency to freeze in the coldest parts of the circuit,
thus giving rise to obstructions which prevent the cooling efficiency.

Also check belt tension: when finger pressure is applied to the mid-point
between both pulleys, the belt should deflect 8-10 mm (0,315-0,394 in) at
most.

The system check begins by

inspecting the condition of the
refrigerant through the inspec-
tion window on top of the recei-
ver-drier placed on the cab
ceiling. The refrigerant, as
seen through the inspection
window, should be clear and
free of bubbles.

220
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Condenser fins must always be duly clean. Cleaning should be done

using water or an air jet (pay particular attention not to bend the fins, if
necessary straighten the fins again using a special tool).
Ascertain that the compressor is firmly secured to tractor and the pulleys
are properly aligned.
WARNING - When removing the strainer or the air conditioning unit it is
necessary to plug the inlet and oulet pipes at once, this to prevent both
dust and moisture from entering the system.

Air conditioning system compressor

T h e c o m p r e s s o r mu s t b e
securely fixed to the tractor.
T h e r e f r i g e r a n t c i r c u i t is
pressurised and therefore
must never be opened.
The ecological refrigerant R
134a is non-toxic and
odourless, and is not
inflammable.
However, there are certain
essential safety precautions
when handling refrigerant:

• Avoid direct contact with

skin, as this can cause
lesions similare to chilblains
• Avoid contact with eyes; should the refrigerant enter your eyes,
seek medical assistance immediately.
• Any welding either directly on the refrigerant circuit or in the imme-
diate vicinity is strictly prohibited. The refrigerant must not be be
exposed to temperatures in excess of 80°C (176°F).
• Couplings to disconnect
the pipes of the air-condi-
tioning system in order to
remove the cab.

Service valves of the air con-

ditioning system
Servicing and charging
operations must be entrusted
to a specialist service centre
A - high pressure
B - low pressure

221
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

Tractors with high-visibility cab roof

Cab air filter (cleaning)

The air filters are located at the sides of the cab roof lining at the sides.

Periodically (according to the conditions of use): clean the filter.

To access the filter, unclip and remove the cover and then withdraw the
filter.

Air conditioning system check

The system check begins by inspecting the condition of the refrigerant

through the inspection window on top of the receiver-drier placed on the
cab ceiling.
The refrigerant, as seen through the inspection window, should be clear
and free of bubbles.

WARNING: CONTACT WITH REFRIGERANT CAN CAUSE SEVERE

SKIN LESIONS. IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH THE EYES, DO NOT
RUB EYES, SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ASSISTANCE.

222
SECTION V MAINTENANCE

General cleaning of the tractor

Clean the tractor with a steam or water jet (do not exceed 6 bar / 87 psi).

Protect all the data plates containing safety or service information. Should
any of the data plates become illegible, have them replaced immediately.

If you intend to clean the engine at the same time, protect the air filter,
alternator and starter motor.

After replacing any parts you removed prior to cleaning, run the engine for
a few minutes to dry off any wet components.

Cleaning with detergents

Choose commercial products that dissolve oil.

The detergent/water solution can be applied by spray gun or brush.

After applying the solution, wait a few minutes then rinse with clean water.

Cleaning with compressed air

This cleaning method is only suitable for removing dust.

When cleaning the grilles in the engine compartment or the cab filters,
always direct the air jet in the opposite direction to the normal air flow.

223
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SECTION 6 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Always disconnect the battery before carrying out any work on the
electrical system. Before any welding operations, disconnect the battery
and all the connectors of the electronic control units.

Battery
Checking the battery

DANGER: BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES. KEEP

FLAMES, SPARKS AND SMOKING MATERIAL AWAY FROM
BATTERIES. VENTILATION IS REQUIRED, WHEN CHARGING OR
STORING BATTERIES. AVOID CONTACT BETWEEN ACID AND SKIN
OR CLOTHES.

The battery is of the maintenance-free type.

The battery status is displayed by the magic
eye above the battery.

When the magic eye is coloured:

- GREEN —-> charge sufficient
- BLACK —> needs charging
- WHITE— -> needs topping up

CAUTION: BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATIONS, READ THE

INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL. FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS
CAREFULLY DURING OPERATION OF THE TRACTOR.

CAUTION: DISCONNECT THE BATTERY CABLES, BEFORE TO

VERIFY OR REPAIR THE ELECTRICAL WIRING OR BEFORE TO
START WELDING OPERATIONS ON TRACTOR OR ON ATTACHED
IMPLEMENTS.

WARNING: BATTERY POSTS, TERMINALS AND RELATED

AC C E S S O R I E S C O N TAI N LE AD AN D L E AD C O M P O U N D S ,
CHEMICALS KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE
CANCER AND BIRTH DEFECTS OR OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM.
WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.

224
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

To remove the battery from the tractor, proceed as follows:

On tractors without front lift and PTO, the battery is located in the forward
part of the engine compartment.

1 -Lift the hood.

2 - Disconnect the
negative battery lead,
then the positive lead;
3 - Loosen the 4 screws
securing the 2 retaining
brackets and remove the
battery from the shelf.
The terminal clamps must
be kept clean and
preferably coated with
Vaseline.

On tractors with front lift and PTO, the battery is located in the forward part
of the engine compartment.

1- remove the four knobs,

lift the protective cover
and remove.
2 - Disconnect the
negative battery lead,
then the positive lead;
3 - Loosen the 4 screws
securing the 2 retaining
brackets and remove the
battery from the shelf.

The terminal clamps must be kept clean and preferably coated with
Vaseline.
Having completed the necessary checks, reinstall the battery,
remembering to connect the positive lead before the negative lead.

Important: Check frequently that the battery is securely anchored.

225
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Fuse box

1 - Fuse box
2 - Relay
3 - Max fuse
4 - Diagnostics socket

To access, remove the panel on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.

Always switch off the ignition and all electrical equipment before changing
a fuse or a relay. The fuses and relays can be identified from the diagram
on the inside of the fuse box cover.
Before changing a blown fuse, switch off the electrical power at the ignition
switch, eliminate the problem which caused the fuse to blow, and then
replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.

NOTE: Always switch off the engine before checking or replacing fuses and
relays.

NOTE: Only use original fuses. The electrical system could be irreparably
damaged by fitting an unsuitable fuse.

DANGER: START THE ENGINE, WITH THE STARTER KEY, FROM THE
OPERATOR’S SEAT ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE
ENGINE BY SHORTING ACROSS THE STARTER TERMINALS. THE
MACHINE WILL START IN GEAR IF THE NEUTRAL START CIRCUIT IS
BYPASSED. THIS COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
ANYONE IN THE VICINITY OF THE TRACTOR. ENSURE THAT THE
ENGINE STARTER SOLENOID COVER IS ALWAYS IN POSITON.

226
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Fuse box

5A

20 A

15 A
15 A

15 A
K1

15 A

STOP 10 A

10 A

10 A
MAXIFUS.

15 A

+15 15 A
W1

15 A

15 A
7.5A

7.5A

NOTE: Do not use solvents or thinners to clean the radar sensor; use water
only.

DANGER: MAKE SURE YOU CONNECT THE BATTERY TERMINALS

CORRECTLY. DANGER OF SHORT-CIRCUIT!

227
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Symbols on the fuse box

5A Instrument panel

Steering column switch - lights input

20 A
Hazard warning
15 A

15 A Compressor seat - Cigar lighter

STOP
STOP 10 A

10 A Lights input

10 A Flashing light

15 A Corner light

+ current
+15 15 A
Direction indicators
15 A
Lower Front Worklights
15 A

Sidelight
7.5A

7.5A Sidelight

Main beam headlights

15 A

15 A Low beam headlights

228
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Cab fuse box

F1 - Flasher unit
F2 - Radio
F3 - Air conditioning
F4 - Blower/heater
F5 - Front wiper
F6 - Rear wiper
F7 - Front work lights
F8 - Rear work lights

DANGER: TAKE CARE NOT TO CAUSE DANGEROUS SPARKS

WHEN WORKING IN PROXIMITY TO FUEL DEPOSITS OR OTHER
FLAMMABLE MATERIAL.

229
 230
Electric system diagram (part one)
Start Engine
MV1
125a

Start Switch
-31 Battery
+30 Battery

Start Relay
50

87
30
30A
MX-1

85
86
30
60A
MD-1

15

H.D.Relay
87
30
86

Heating Device
Start Overboost
ISO Socket
M
1 2 3

Engine Stop
Lighter
+58
F.4
15A

Chair comand
M

Low W.L./Platform Switch

+58
Low W.L./platform W.L.
15A
F.11

Air Brake Trailer Sensor

p

+58
+15 RELAY
87
30

Air Brake Indicator

85
86

+58
F.8
15A

Corner Lights
Corner Lights Switch
F.5
10A

Stop Sensor
Stop Lights
Position Lights
7.5A
F.12

+58
Right
F.6
10A

Pos.Lights Switch
Position Lights
7.5A
F.16
+30

+15

Left
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECTION VI
231
Electric system diagram (part two)
Low-Beam Lights
15A
F.13
F.2
20A

F.14

Trailer Socket
15A
56b 56a
56

6
7
5

High-Beam Lights
I
56d

31b
31

4
1
3

Horn
Emergency E.C.U.
1
5
2
3

Directions Directions
4

Lights Comand
L
6

49a

R
15
15A
F.10

49
30
F.3
15A

49a
L

Directions
Emergency Switch
R

Lights
-31

+58

Front PTO Switch

Front PTO EV +58
F.9
15A

Rear PTO Switch

Front PTO EV +58
DF Switch
EV DF +58
Flasher +58
Flasher Platform

t
F.7
10A

5-20
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECTION VI
 232
Electric system diagram (part three)
t

Motor Temper.Sensor
3-14

5-20 5-21

Gear Start Consent

3-4

342
P

Fuel Level Sensor

3-22

Hand Brake Sensor

DT Sensor
3-17

PTO 1540
3-11

PTO 1000
3-10

PTO ECO Sensor

3-9

PTO Syncro Sensor

3-24

Oil Brakes Sensor

3-7

Transmission
p
3-18

Motor Pressure Ses.

p
3-6

Air Filter
p
3-5

Services
3-19

Trailer Pressure Sensor

3-12
5-5

Feedback H.D.
3-18 3-8

ISO 9141
5-17 5-1
5-13

+50
5-7
Cold start relay
Gear lever control 5-17
5-16
5-9 5-19 5-8
5-18
Seat Sensor

5-12
3-21
F.1
5A

5-11
3-15

5-10
3-20
Generator

W
3
G
5-24

B-
D+
B+
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECTION VI
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

+30 Battery
-31 Battery

Flashing light Switch

Flashing light

F.1
10A
Cab Light

+12v Socket
4

F.2
5A
Freon Fan Air Conditioner Relay
5
87

30
M

F.3

F.M-3
85

86

30A

50A
P

17 Bar Pressure Switch

Heating Fan
Heating-Air Conditioner Group
1

Fan Speed Switch

Ventilation Switch
1
2
3

Air Conditioner Relay

Compressor
87

30
3
M

F.4
85

86

20A
1
2
P
8

4
P

Anti-Frost Temperature Sensor

2-27 Bar Pressure Switch
Cab Relay
87

30
85

86

Back Work Lights

F.7
10A

Back work Lights Switch

Front Work Lights

F.8
10A

Front work Lights Switch

53a
31b

Front Windscreen
Wiper Switch
31

2
53

Front Windscreen
7

Wiper Engine
F.5
7.5A
8

Front Windscreen
Wiper Water Poump
M

1
31

Rear Windscreen
M

2
53

Wiper Switch
Rear Window
7

Wiper Engine
F.6
7.5A

Rear Windows
8

Wiper Water Poump

M

Electric system diagram - cab

233
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Air conditioning system functional diagram

COLLEGAMENTI
ESTERNI

N4
B
C4
1 F
2

BV 0.5
A
NZ 0.5
1
CR 1
2 T
B 0.5
3 CO
4
B 0.5

B 0.5 S
N4
M
M R4

CR 1

NZ 0.5
87
86
M 2.5 BV 0.5
85
C1
LR 1.5 30
RC
R 2.5

B 0.5
C4
R4

3
TF
RV C 2

Key to air conditioning components

M Blower speed
RV Blower speed control resistor
C Blower speed selector
RC Air conditioner relay
F Power supply fuse
T Air conditioning pressure switch
CO Compressor
S Thermostat
B Supply block
A Block for air conditioning system variant

WARNING: WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN CHARGING OR

BOOSTING BATTERY.

234
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

AL CABL.FARI LAVORO
To wiring work light 9

AL GRUPPO RISCALDAMENTO 12
CONDIZIONAMENTO BORLETTI
To Borletti group PLAFONIERA
Roff lamp
17
13

270

INTERUTTORE LAMPEGGIANTE
GND Flashing-light switch
16 5
14
GUAINA MONOBACK-Sheath ø 20

AL TERGI ANTERIORE
To glass washer INT.TERGI POSTERIORE
Back-side glass washer switch
100 3
11
AL CABlAGGIO POMPE TERGI
To wiring wiper pump
INT.TERGI ANTERIORE
Front-side glass washer switch
100
4
AL CABLAGGIO ALIMENTAZIONE 6
To power supply INT.FARI LAVORO POSTERIORI
15 Rear-side work light switch

INT.FARI LAVORO ANTERIORI

Front-side work light switch
7

AL CABL.RADIO/TERGI P./
LAMPEGGIANTE
5 A RADIO

8 To wiring radio/wiper/
flash light
10 A

7.5 A
7.5 A

100
30 A
20 A

10 A
10 A

1
AL CABL.CONDIZIONATORE
To air conditioner wiring
SCATOLA PORTAFUSIBILI
FUSES BOX 10 350

RELE'
Relay 2

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray

High-visibility cab

DANGER: WHEN HANDLING BATTERIES:

- AVOID BREATHING IN FUMES P RODUCED BY THE ACID
SOLUTION (if the acid is accidentally swallowed, drink plenty of wa-
ter or milk, then drink beaten eggs or vegetal oil; seek medical atten-
tion immediately)
- USE THE APPROPRIATE PROCEDURE WHEN CHARGING
- CLEAN ALL PARTS WHERE ACID SOLUTION MIGHT HAVE
SPILLED. IF IT SPILLS ON THE HANDS, NEUTRALIZE IT WITH
HYDRATED LIME OR SODIUM BICARBONATE. IF IT HITS THE EYES,
RINSE REPEATEDLY FOR 10-15 MINUTES, THEN SEEK MEDICAL
ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.

235
 236
Functional diagram of high-visibility roof electrical system
INT.FARI LAVORO POSTERIORI INT.TERGI POSTERIORE
AL CABL.CONDIZIONATORE Rear-side work light switch Back-side glass washer switch
To air conditioner wiring INT.FARI LAVORO ANTERIORI INTERUTTORE LAMPEGGIANTE INT.TERGI ANTERIORE
Front-side work light switch Flashing-light switch Front-side glass washer switch
7 6 5 4 3
2 3 8 7 2 3 8 7 2 3 8 7 1 5 3 6 2 3 5 2 6
AL CABL.RADIO/TERGI P./
LAMPEGGIANTE
10 A

To wiring radio/wiper/
5 A RADIO
30 A
20 A
10 A
10 A

7.5 A
7.5 A

G1
G1
GN 1
GN 1.5
R1.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
VN 1
AN 1
AN 1
GR 1
HN 1
A1
A1

GV 1.5

MG 1.5
N1
N1
N1
AR 1
C1

flash light
H-N 1
M 1.5
8 R1
3 2 1
AL CABL.FARI LAVORO
To wiring work light
G-N 1
G-N 1
TAPPO
TERGI
TERGI

ANTERIORI
POSTERIRI
ANTERIORE
POSTERIORE

FARI LAVORO
FARI LAVORO
LAMPEGGIANTE

9 G1
G1

4 3 2 1
R1
R1
V1
AN 2.5
V1
10 N 2.5

3 2 1
6 5 4
N1
N1
11 AR 1

31
2
C1
AL CABlAGGIO POMPE TERGI
To wiring wiper pump
N1
V1
12 VN 1.5
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

43 2 1
V1
AL GRUPPO RISCALDAMENTO M Marrone/Brown C Arancio/Orange
CONDIZIONAMENTO BORLETTI V Verde/Green A Azzurro/Blue
To Borletti group Z Viola/Violet B Bianco/White
R4 N Nero/Black L Blu/Dark Blue

A
S Rosa/Pink G Giallo/Yellow
S.U.1

13 R Rosso/Red H Grigio/Gray
N4

B
VN 1
GR 1
14
N1
AN 1
AL TERGI ANTERIORE
To glass washer
VN 1.5
1 2 LB 1
15
3
R 2.5
AL CABLAGGIO ALIMENTAZIONE
To power supply

N1
R1
R1
R1.5
R1
AN 2.5
R4
AN 1
A1
GV 1.5
MG 1.5
LB 1

N1
N4
N1
N 2.5
N1
N1
N1
1
30 2
17 A 85 86
H
87 RELE'
16 PLAFONIERA 1 8
Roff lamp
R 2.5 M 2.5
GND
M 2.5
SCATOLA PORTAFUSIBILI
FUSES BOX
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECTION VI
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Lights
Cleaning the headlights and sidelights
Clean with water or specific commercial products. We recommend that you switch off the
lights before cleaning.

Bulb replacement
Front headlights H4 12V 60/55W double filament bulb
The headlights have double- filament bulbs for main and dipped beam
ilumination.

To replace the bulbs, remove the

front grille and proceed as
follows:

– detach connector 1 from the

base of the bulb.
– peel back and remove the
rubber cover 2.
– turn slightly the spring clip 3
that holds the bulb base 4 in
position and detach it from
the reflector.
WARNING: avoid touching the
inner surface of the reflector.
Make sure no foreign material
gets inside the reflector.

– Insert the new bulb so that

the locator tabs engage the
notches in the rim of the
reflctor 5.
– Replace the ruber cover 2,
making sure that it fits snugly
against the edge of the re-
flector.
– Push connector 1 onto the
terminals on the bulb base.

237
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Rear light assemblies

The tractor is equipped with two rear light assemblies on each fender
(right and left) comprising the following lights:

A - red tail light.

Bulb: DIN 72601-R5W 12V 5W

B - brake light.
Bulb: DIN 72601-P21 12V 21W

C - direction indicator light.

Bulb: DIN 72601-P21 12V 21W

D - licence plate light: Bulb: DIN 72601-K 12V 10W

To replace any of these bulbs, proceed as follows:

– Remove the screws 1 securing the red or yellow-red lens 2.
– Gently remove the lens 2 to access the bulb.
– Turn the defective bulb counter-clockwise under slight pressure as far
as it will go.
– Remove the bulb.
– Insert the new bulb and turn clockwise under slight pressure as far as
it will go.
– Replace the lens 2 and secure with the screws 1.
238
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Front sidelights and direction indicators

For tractors with platform

For tractors with cab

The light clusters mounted on each side of the tractor contain two bulbs:
A - sidelights B - direction indicators.

Bulb: DIN 72601-R5W 12V 5W - sidelight

Bulb: DIN 72601-P21 12V 21W - direction indicator

To replace either of the bulbs, proceed as follows:

– Remove the two screws securing the yellow-white lens.

– Gently remove the lens to access the bulb.
– Apply light pressure and turn the defective bulb counter-clockwise as
far as it will go.
– Remove the bulb.
– Insert the new bulb, apply light pressure and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
– Replace the lens and the two retaining screws.

239
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Front and rear working lights in cab roof

Bulbs: DIN 72601-H3 12V 55W -front (4) and rear (4)
To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:
– Carefully clean the outside of the light unit to avoid the risk of dirt get-
ting on the reflector during bulb replacement.
– Using your hands only (tools could easily damage the components) un-
screw the two screws securing the rear cover and access the bulb as fol-
lows:
– Detach the connector from the bulb base.
– Slightly rotate the spring clip that holds the bulb base in position, and
detach it from the reflector, disconnecting also the lead conected di-
rectly to the bulb.

WARNING: avoid touching the inner surface of the reflector. Make sure no
foreign material gets inside the reflector.

– Insert the new bulb, engaging the locating tabs with the notches on the
reflector rim. Connect the bulb lead.
– Push connector onto the terminals on the bulb base.
– Replace the lens and the two retaining screws.

240
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

WARNING: only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and

specification as those originally fitted.

Worklight located at the rear of the safety roll bar.

NOTE: Switch off the front and rear lights before cleaning them.

WARNING: CONNECT ONLY TO A 12 VOLT SUPPLY TO BOOST

BATTERY.

241
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Interior courtesy light

Cab courtesy light

DIN 72601-K 12V 10W

Cab courtesy light

To change the bulb, remove the body of the light fitting by pulling it
outwards.

242
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Change the bulb

Reposition the light fitting in its seating

243
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Headlight alignment
The tractor must be in normal road-going conditions and parked on a level
surface at a distance of 10 m (32.8 ft) from a wall (tyres must be inflated to
the correct pressures and the front wheels must be positioned for travel in
a straight line).

Switch on the dipped beam headlights.

1 - points on the wall corresponding to the centres of the headlights

A - distance apart of headlights
H - height of headlights
h - distance of the centre of the beam from the horizontal axis
X - distance between headlights and wall

244
SECTION VI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Turn the adjuster screws indicated by the arrows in the figure to move the
beam in a vertical or horizontal direction.

NOTE: in order to determine the points on the wall corresponding to the

centres of the headlights, we recommend that you bring the tractor up to
the wall with the dipped headlights on, mark the centres on the wall and
then move back to a distance of 10 m (32.8 ft) from the wall.

Horizontal adjustment
With the headlights switched on, the centres of the beams should be apart
the distance A indicated in the figure.

Vertical adjustment
With the headlights on, the lines delimiting the light and dark zones on the
wall should 10cm (3.9 in) apart as shown in the figure.

IMPORTANT: The figure refers to headlight alignment for driving on the

right-hand side of the road. For driving on the left-hand side of the road, the
dark beam zone projected on the wall must be symmetrical to that shown
in the figure (i.e. the points of the dark zone that penetrate the light zone
must always be directed towards the edge of the road).

CAUTION: ALWAYS WEAR CLOTHING SUITABLE FOR THE TYPE OF

WORK TO BE PERFORMED. IF NECESSARY, USE HEARING
PROTECTION PLUGS AND WEAR EYE PROTECTION.

245
SECTION VII STORAGE OF THE TRACTOR

SECTION 7 - STORAGE OF THE

TRACTOR
Operations prior to garaging the tractor for a long period

for example, before winter

If the tractor is not to be used for a long period, we recommend that you
carry out the following operations to prevent certain components from
deteriorating during storage.

– Run engine to thoroughly warm oil in crankcase. Drain oil and install
new filter element. Refill crankcase with fresh oil as recommended in
Specification section.

– Top up the cooling system radiator with the prescribed coolant with
anti-freeze and anti-corrosion properties.

– Fill the fuel tank completely to prevent the condensation forming insi-
de the tank.

– Start the engine and check that the fuel system and the injection
system are functioning correctly.

– Check that the fuel filters are clean.

– Slightly loosen the fuel filler cap and the radiator cap so that the relati-
ve seals are not kept under pressure.

– Clean the air filter element. Lubricate the tractor as specified in the
maintenance schedule.

– Remove the battery from the tractor and clean the two terminals (posi-
tive/negative).

– The battery should be charged and then stored in a cool, dry place.

CAUTION: ALWAYS WEAR CLOTHING SUITABLE FOR THE TYPE OF

WORK TO BE PERFORMED. IF NECESSARY, USE HEARING
PROTECTION PLUGS AND WEAR EYE PROTECTION.

246
SECTION VII STORAGE OF THE TRACTOR

– Cover the exhaust pipe with a plastic sheet held in place with adhesive
tape. The tractor must be completely clean; touch-up any scratches in
the paintwork to prevent rust from forming.

– Apply a layer of grease to exposed metal surfaces as a protection

against rust.

The tractor should be stored in a suitable garage, and preferably not

exposed to dust. If the tractor has to be stored outside, cover it with a
sheet.

IMPORTANT: do not leave the tractor idle for a long period without having
first carried out the operations listed above.

Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of storage

– Remove the tractor from the wheel stands (if used).

– Remove the cover sheet (if any);

– Remove the cover from the exhaust.

– Charge and refit the battery (follow the instructions given in this ma-
nual).

– Start the engine and allow to tick over slowly for a few minutes.

– Do not use the throttle until you are sure that the engine is running cor-
rectly.
– Carry out all the operations prescribed in this manual for the start of
the working season; the tractor will then be ready to be put back into
service.

247
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 8 - TECHNICAL DATA

Technical specifications
NOTE:for the equivalence of measures in british and in metric systems
see the Conversion tables at page LIX.

Engine 85 85 GS 100 100 GS

Type BF 4M 2012 CE 56T BF 4M 2012 CE 71T
EC type approval TIER II
US type approval EPA II
Configuration KLU 2500 KLU 2500 KLU 2500 KLU 2500
7151 TIER II 7771 TIER II 7152 TIER II 7772 TIER II
Governor mechanical mechanical mechanical mechanical
Engine stop electric
N° cylinders 4
Bore mm 101
Stroke mm 126
Displacement cm2 4038
Max power kW/HP 60.6/82 70.5/96
ISO/2300
Max power kW/HP 62/84 72.5/98
ISO/2200
Engine speed rpm 825/2300/2415 825/2300/2415
idle/normal
load/no load
Max torque/load Nm 293 355
Speed at max rpm 1380/1725 1380/1725
torque
Torque rise % 31 33
Specific fuel g/kWh 240 239
consumption
Cooling system Pressurized circuit/header with coolant indicator
Fuel system Prefilter with water separator and manual bleed pump -
main filter - fuel cooler
Fuel tank l 150
Induction Turbocharger
Preheat Glow plug, electronically controlled

CAUTION: CAREFULLY READ ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CONTAINED IN THE OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS LISTED ON THE TRACTOR’S
DECALS.

248
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Engine 85 85GS 100 100GS

Alternator 12V 95Ah

Starter motor 12V 3 kW
Radiator Aluminium (maximum operating pressure 0.7 - 1 bar)
Fuel cooler Aluminium (maximum operating pressure 1.5 bar)
Transmission oil cooler Aluminium (maximum operating pressure 12 bar)
Air intake Plastic, with inlet for air cleaner dust unload tube
Fan 10 blades/diameter 450 mm
Fuel filter Prefilter with water separator and manual bleed pump
+ main filter
Air cleaner Donaldson Alexin
Exhaust pipe Vertical, along Lx cab upright

4WD axle 85 85GS 100 100GS

Type SGDF Size 2

Maximum permissible load kg 3000
Tyre size limit 13.6R28
Direction of rotation clockwise
Speed reducing ratio 40km/h (35/10)=3,5 (69/12)=6,75
total 23.625
Width mm 1770
Tilt angle ° 7
Angle of incidence ° 7
Brakes Sintered material, oil-immersed
Steering 2 double-acting hydraulic rams
Steering angle ° 55°
Swing angle ° 10
Differential lock Mechanical, electrohydraulically operated

2WD axle 85 85GS 100 100GS

Width mm 1530
Tilt angle ° 3

249
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2WD axle 85 85GS 100 100GS

Angle of incidence ° 8
Brakes Sintered material, oil-immersed
Steering 2 double-acting hydraulic rams
Steering angle ° 65°
Swing angle ° 12

Main clutch 85 85GS 100 100GS

Main clutch dry plate multi-plate, dry multi-plate,

12” oil-immersed plate13” oil-immersed
Control pedal Pedal/pushbutton pedal Pedal/pushbutton
hydrostatic electrohydraulic hydrostatic electrohydraulic

Transmission 40 km/h 85 85GS 100 100GS

T4000 T4100 T5000 T5100

Mechanical gearshift 20+20 - 20+20 -

Power shuttle - 20+20 - 20+20
Power shuttle - 40+40 - 40+40
+ Hi-Lo
Shuttle mechanical hydraulic mechanical hydraulic
Number of gears 5 synchromesh 5 synchromesh
Number of ranges 3+ creeper 3+ creeper
Sleeve clutch Sleeve clutch
4WD clutch mechanical Easy-shift mechanical Easy-shift
electrohydraulic electrohydraulic
STOP and GO - - - -
Engine rpm sensor - - - -
Wheel speed sensor STD STD
Gearbox in neutral sensor STD STD
Width 1640 1740
Crown wheel and pinion 9/38 10/39
Final drive ratio 5.77 6.75

250
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Rear power take-off 85 85GS 100 100GS

(PTO)

Clutch discs, hydraulic discs, hydraulic

Control electrohydraulic electrohydraulic
Splined shaft screw-on screw-on
Speed rpm 540/1000
Speed rpm 540/540E/1000/1000E

Front power take-off 85 85GS 100 100GS

(PTO)

Speed rpm 1000

Control electrohydraulic electrohydraulic
Lubrication Forced, with external Forced, with external filter
filter
Oil cooler Aluminium - low pressure

Live power take-off 85 85GS 100 100GS

Clutch sliding sleeve sliding sleeve

Control mechanical with spring mechanical with spring
Shaft independent independent

Service brakes 85 85GS 100 100GS

Type Oil-immersed discs

Control hydrostatic
Circuit Separate, with braking mode selector valve
Akros Matic oil Reservoir shared with clutch circuit
Pedal Separate left-right, with latch

251
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Parking brakes 85 85GS 100 100GS

Type Multiple discs, oil-immersed

Control Independent of service brakes
Operation Manual, with lever

Trailer braking 85 85GS 100 100GS

Italy type hydraulic

France type hydraulic
Italy type air
Germany type air

Hydraulic system 85 85GS 100 100GS

Circuit design OPEN CENTER

Hydraulic pump CC 14 (37 19 (44 14 (37 19 (44
power steering l/min) l/min) l/min) l/min)
Hydraulic pump CC 22,5 (54 l/min) 22,5 (54 l/min)
spool valves/lift
Transfer pump - internal - internal
Suction filters 3 1 internal 3 1 internal
Pressure line filters 40 bar - 1 - 1
Power steering 4WD Reactive hydrostatic Reactive hydrostatic
4WD OSPC 125 OR OSPC 125 OR
2WD OSPC 80 OR OSPC 80 OR
Resonator STD STD
CE spool valves Bucher HDMS 11S 4-way (1 detent + 1 spring return)
CE spool valves Bucher HDMS 11S 6-way (1 detent + 2 spring return + Float +
check valve)
US spool valves Bucher HDMS 11S 4-way (+Float)
US spool valves Bucher HDMS 11S 6-way (+Float)
External pressure ports Push-pull couplers with oil-drip reservoir

252
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Rear lift 85 85GS 100 100GS

Control mechanical mechanical

Lifting capacity 3450 4800
Lifting capacity - 6200
Controls in cab Mechanical, levers Mechanical, levers
Controls on fender mechanical mechanical

3-point linkage 85 85GS 100 100GS

Class class II class II

Lift links fixed ball end fixed ball end
Lift links auto-hitch auto-hitch
Stabilizers telescopic telescopic
Stabilizers automatic automatic

Tow hitches and drawbars 85 85GS 100 100GS

Class C fixed fixed

Class C sliding sliding
Class D sliding sliding
Class D2 sliding sliding
Class CE sliding sliding
Class CE automatic automatic
Class A Swinging drawbar Swinging drawbar

253
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Electrical system 85 85GS 100 100GS

Voltage 12V
Battery under hood 12V - 120A-520A
Battery under cab 12V - 180A-800A
Alternator 12V - 95Ah
Starter motor 12V - 3kW
Main fuse box Under instrument panel
Cab fuse box in roof
Power fuses glow plug/transmission/cab roof
Digital instrument electronic - multifunction
Key /Engine STOP Instrument panel, Rx side
Conditions enabling engine start transmission in N/PTO clutch in N
Steering column stalk switches direction indicators/headlights/flasher/horn
Sidelights switch Instrument panel, Lx side
Hazard warning lights switch
Work lights switch
Beacon switch
Differential control Rx side console
Front PTO control
12V socket
PTO speed sensor Lx side console
Economy PTO sensor
Live PTO sensor
Parking brake sensor
Work lights switch Positioned in cab head-lining, Lx side
Front/rear screen wipers
Heating controls
Air conditioning controls
Radio installation-ready

254
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Driver seat 85 85GS 100 100GS

Platform With safety roll bar (ROPS) and sunshade

Rear view mirrors adjustable
Cab Standard/with high-visibility roof
Grammer seat MSG83/721
fabric/synthetic with MECHANICAL suspension
with weight sensor
with inertia reel seat belts
Grammer seat MSG95A/721
fabric/synthetic
with PNEUMATIC suspension
with weight sensor
with inertia reel seat belts

Controls 85 85GS 100 100GS

Clutch pedal pendant type

Brake pedals Pendant type with latch, used independently or together
Gearshift lever Floor mounted
Hi-Lo - pushbuttons - pushbuttons
Shuttle lever floor instrument floor instrument
panel panel
Range shift lever Pedal - lever
Mechanical accelerator floor
Electronic accelerator -
Rear PTO clutch electrohydraulically operated
4WD clutch mechanical electrohydra mechanical electrohydra
ulic ulic
Front PTO clutch electrohydraulically operated
Differential lock electrohydraulically operated
Rear lift Draft/position levers
Spool valve Single levers
Parking brake Mechanically operated by Bowden cable
Economy PTO clutch Mechanically operated by push-pull handle
Live PTO clutch

255
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Front lift 85 85GS 100 100GS

Type Double acting

Class II
Control Rear spool valve lever/selector valve
Lifting capacity 1800
Crushing capacity 1200
Hydraulic dampers 2
Lift links folding/swinging
Link ends auto-hitch

Front loader 85 85GS 100 100GS

Type STOLL
Structure SPECIFICA

256
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum permissible loads 85 85GS 100 100GS

4WD
With cab/without front lift for 85-100 standard
With cab/with front lift for 85-100GS
Unladen weight, front axle 1550 1750 1750 2000
Unladen weight, rear axle 2150 2050 2400 2300
Unladen weight, total 3700 3800 4150 4300
Maximum load, front axle 2800 2800 3000 3000
Maximum load, rear axle 3300 3300 4800 4800
Maximum permissible load 6100 6100 7200 7200
Maximum working load 2400 2300 3050 2900
2WD (platform/ROPS)
Unladen weight, front axle 1200 - - 1250
Unladen weight, rear axle 2000 - - 2150
Unladen weight, total 3200 - - 3400
Maximum load, front axle 1800 - - 1800
Maximum load, rear axle 3300 - - 4800
Maximum permissible load 4800 - - 5300
Maximum working load 1600 - - 1900

257
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions and weights 85HP

2WD 4WD
Rear tyres 16.9R30 16.9R30
Max. Length
- without linkage (A)mm 3850 3850
Min.-max. Width (B)mm 2050-2458 2050-2458
Max. height
- at safety frame (C)mm 2710 2710
- at cab (D)mm 2560* 2560*
Ground clearance
- beneath front axle (E)mm 450 450
Wheel base (F)mm 2215 2310
Front track
- standard (G)mm 1600/2100 1600/2100
Rear track
- standard (H)mm 1600/2100 1600/2100
Min. turning radius
- without brakes mm 3050** 3350**
Operating weight
- with safety frame kg 2990 3340
- with cab kg 3140 3490
* With standard roof
**With maximum steering angle

258
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions and weights 100HP

2WD 4WD
Rear tyres 16.9R34 16.9R34
Max. Length
- without linkage (A)mm 3950 3950
Min.-max. Width (B)mm 2050-2458 2050-2458
Max. height
- at safety frame (C)mm 2790 2790
- at cab (D)mm 2635* 2635*
Ground clearance
- beneath front axle (E)mm 500 500
Wheel base (F)mm 2245 2340
Front track
- standard (G)mm 1600/2100 1600/2100
Rear track
- standard (H)mm 1600/2100 1600/2100
Min. turning radius
- without brakes mm 3050** 3500**
Operating weight
- with safety frame kg 3500 3800
- with cab kg 3140 3490
* With standard roof
**With maximum steering angle

259
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Noise level perceived by the driver

The maximum noise level, measured at the ear of the driver in accordance
with the test method described in Addendum II to the European Directive
EEC 77/311 is the following:
CAB ROLL BAR
Model Maximum noise level measured at the Maximum noise level me-
Type of driver’s seat with doors and windows Type of
asured at the driver’s seat
cab roll bar
open* db(A) closed db(A) db(A)

85 HP C41 81,5 74,5 T79 85,1

100 HP C41 80,3 74,3 T79 84,3

* Roof hatch and rear window open

Warning! If the noise level with continuous tractor operation turns out to
be equal to or greater than 85 dB(A), the user needs to take the
appropriate precautions, as stated in the Italian Legislative Decree DL no.
277 dated 15/08/1991, in articles 41, 42, 43 and 44.

260
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Power take-off operating characteristics

rear

Oil-immersed 5-disc clutch

with electrohydraulic control
(pushbutton control located on fender to right of driver)
x
Diameter mm 124,5
Material graphite
Ouput shaft (profile) 6/21
splines
(1" 3/8)
rpm PTO PTO rpm/min Engine rpm/min
Nominal effective
540 rpm 596 2083
1000 rpm 1006 2286
750ECO rpm 761 1663
1300ECO rpm 1284 1792
Ground-operated controls on fender x

P.T.O./engine r.p.m. ratio

540 3.8571
1000 2.2857
750ECO 3.0234
1300ECO 1.7917

front
Oil-immersed disc clutch
with electrohydraulic control o
Disk diameter: 124,5 mm
Number of disks: 4
Ouput shaft (profile): 1.3/8’’ with 21 ssplines
P.T.O./engine r.p.m. ratio: 1/2.400

261
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Synchronized P.T.O.
Outlet terminal with 6 splines ∅ = (1" 3/8)
Ratio between synchronised P.T.O. shaft speed and rear axle revolutions.
P.T.O. revolutions per axle revolution
85HP 100HP
T4000-T4100 T5000-T5100
40 km/h 40 km/h
23.705 31,026

For convenience we also give P.T.O speed per metre of travel for the various tyre
sizes.

85HP
T4000-T4100
Rear tyres P.T.O. r.p.m. for meter travel
40 km/h
420/85R30 5.39
480/70R30 5.39
420/85R34 5.03
16.9R34 5.03
540/65R34 5.03
480/70R34 5.03
340/85R38 5.03
13.6R38 5.03

85HP
T5000-T5100
Rear tyres P.T.O. r.p.m. for meter travel
40 km/h
480/70R34 6.58
340/85R38 6.58
13.6R38 6.58
420/85R34 6.58
460/85R34 6.37
18.4R34 6.37
520/70R34 6.37
460/85R34 6.37
420/85R38 6.17
480/70R38 6.17
16.9R38 6.17
480/70R38 6.17
540/65R38 6.17

262
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Ballast weights

FRONT BALLAST
PROFILED BLOCK *
Material metal cement
Position overhung
Fixing Slot in with locking pin a pin
Number 2/8 1
Unit mass Kg (lb) 40 (88) 400 (881)
Total mass Kg (lb) 80/320 (176/705 400 (881)
Ballast support - -

* - The block ballast can only be fitted to tractors equipped with front lift

Attachment of implements to the tractor

To allow full use in the widest possible range of applications, the structural
frame of the tractor has been designed to afford a solid, safe mounting for
agricultural or semi-industrial implements.

Before attaching particularly heavy implements to the tractor, please

consult your DEUTZ-FAHR service centre.

There may be special applications in which the tyres the tractor was
equipped with may not be suitable. In those special applications, it is
recommend that your DEUTZ-FAHR dealer be consulted before a
different tyre combination is installed other than what has been approved
in the tyre section of this manual.

Before attaching the implement, check that the tyres are capable of
supporting the load.

Check the markings on the walls of the tyres and consult the tyre
manufacturer’s load tables.

263
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Speed tables
WARNING: R EVERSE SPEEDS ARE EQUAL TO THE
CORRESPONDING FORWARD SPEEDS ON TRACTORS EQUIPPED
WITH HYDRAULIC SHUTTLES.

WA R N IN G : O N T R A C TO R S W IT H H Y D R A U L IC S H U T T L E S ,
REVERSE SPEEDS ARE OBTAINED BY MULTIPLYING THE
CORRESPONDING FORWARD SPEED BY THE COEFFICIENT: 1.044.

Where rear tyres of different size are fitted, speeds vary correspondingly.
To calculate the speed for different tyres, simply multiply the speed values
given on pages 265 - 266 - 267 - 268 by the following factors:

16.9R30 (700mm) 16.9R34 (750mm)

420/85R30 x1 -
480/70R30 x1 -
420/85R34 x 1.07 -
16.9R34 x 1.07 -
540/65R34 x 1.07 -
480/70R34 x 1.07 x1
340/85R38 x 1.07 x1
13.6R38 x 1.07 x1
420/85R34 - x1
460/85R34 - x 1.033
18.4R34 - x 1.033
520/70R34 - x 1.033
460/85R34 - x 1.033
420/85R38 - x 1.06
480/70R38 - x 1.06
16.9R38 - x 1.06
480/70R38 - x 1.06
540/65R38 - x 1.06

Note: to convert Km/h in mph multiply by: 0.6214

Es: Km/h 0,28 x 0.6214 = 0.17 mph

264
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Speed in km/h at 2300 rpm (Version 40 Km/h)

Gearbox 85HP

40 FORWARD GEAR 20 FORWARD GEAR

REAR TYRES
16.9R30
FRONT TYRES
12.4R24
Km/h
1^ RID. Low 0.322
1^ RID. High 1^ RID. 0.376
2^ RID. Low 0.477
2^ RID. High 2^ RID. 0.557
3^ RID. Low 0.635
3^ RID. High 3^ RID. 0.740
4^ RID. Low 0.837
1^ LEN. Low 0.906
4^ RID. High 4^ RID. 0.977
1^ . High 1^ LEN. 1.057
5^ RID. Low 1.111
5^ RID. High 5^ RID. 1.296
2^ LEN. Low 1.342
2^ LEN. High 2^ LEN. 1.565
3^ LEN. Low 1.785
3^ LEN. High 3^ LEN. 2.082
4^ LEN. Low 2.355
4^ LEN. High 4^ LEN. 2.747
1^ MED. Low 2.884
5^ LEN. Low 3.125
1^ MED. High 1^ MED. 3.365
5^ LEN. High 5^ LEN. 3.646
2^ MED. Low 4.273
2^ MED. High 2^ MED. 4.985
3^ MED. Low 5.685
3^ MED. High 3^ MED. 6.633
4^ . Low 7.499
1^ VEL. Low 8.732
4^ MED. High 4^ MED. 8.749
5^ MED. Low 9.954
1^ VEL. High 1^ VEL. 10.188
5^ MED. High 5^ MED. 11.613
2^ . Low 12.936
2^ . High 2^ VEL. 15.093
3^ VEL. Low 17.212
3^ VEL. High 3^ VEL. 20.081
4^ VEL. Low 22.704
4^ VEL. High 4^ VEL. 26.489
5^ . Low 30.135
5^ . High 5^ VEL. 35.159

265
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Speed in km/h at 2300 rpm (Version 40 Km/h)

Gearbox 85HP

40 REVERSE GEAR 20 REVERSE GEAR

REAR TYRES
16.9R30
FRONT TYRES
12.4R24
Km/h
1^ RID. Low 0.335
1^ RID. High 1^ RID. 0.391
2^ RID. Low 0.497
2^ RID. High 2^ RID. 0.580
3^ RID. Low 0.661
3^ RID. High 3^ RID. 0.771
4^ RID. Low 0.872
1^ LEN. Low 0.943
4^ RID. High 4^ RID. 1.079
1^ . High 1^ LEN. 1.100
5^ RID. Low 1.157
5^ RID. High 5^ RID. 1.350
2^ LEN. Low 1.397
2^ LEN. High 2^ LEN. 1.630
3^ LEN. Low 1.859
3^ LEN. High 3^ LEN. 2.169
4^ LEN. Low 2.452
4^ LEN. High 4^ LEN. 2.861
1^ MED. Low 3.003
5^ LEN. Low 3.254
1^ MED. High 1^ MED. 3.504
5^ LEN. High 5^ LEN. 3.797
2^ MED. Low 4.450
2^ MED. High 2^ MED. 5.191
3^ MED. Low 5.920
3^ MED. High 3^ MED. 6.907
4^ . Low 7.809
1^ VEL. Low 9.093
4^ MED. High 4^ MED. 9.111
5^ MED. Low 10.365
1^ VEL. High 1^ VEL. 10.609
5^ MED. High 5^ MED. 12.093
2^ . Low 13.472
2^ . High 2^ VEL. 15.717
3^ VEL. Low 17.924
3^ VEL. High 3^ VEL. 20.911
4^ VEL. Low 23.644
4^ VEL. High 4^ VEL. 27.585
5^ . Low 31.382
5^ . High 5^ VEL. 36.613

266
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Speed in km/h at 2300 rpm (Version 40 Km/h)

Gearbox 100HP

40 FORWARD GEAR 20 FORWARD GEAR

REAR TYRES
16.9R34
FRONT TYRES
14.9R24
Km/h
1^ RID. Low 0.435
1^ RID. High 1^ RID. 0.508
2^ RID. Low 0.586
2^ RID. High 2^ RID. 0.683
3^ RID. Low 0.779
3^ RID. High 3^ RID. 0.909
4^ RID. Low 1.109
4^ RID.High 4^ RID. 1.294
1^ LEN. Low 1.480
5^ RID. Low 1.496
1^ LEN. High 1^ LEN. 1.727
5^ RID. High 5^ RID. 1.745
2^ LEN. Low 1.991
2^ LEN. High 2^ LEN. 1.323
3^ LEN. Low 2.649
3^ LEN. High 3^ LEN. 3.090
1^ MED. Low 3.196
1^ MED. High 1^ MED. 3.729
4^ LEN. Low 3.772
2^ MED. Low 4.299
4^ LEN. High 4^ LEN. 4.401
2^ MED. High 2^ MED. 5.016
5^ LEN. Low 5.086
3^ MED. Low 5.720
5^ Len. High 5^ Len. 5.934
3^ MED. High 3^ MED. 6.674
4^ . Low 8.146
4^ MED. High 4^ MED. 9.504
1^ VEL. Low 9.507
5^ MED. Low 10.985
1^ VEL. High 1^ VEL. 11.104
2^ VEL.Low 12.801
5^ MED. High 5^ MED. 12.816
2^ . High 2^ VEL. 14.935
3^ VEL. Low 17.032
3^ VEL. High 3^ VEL. 19.871
4^ VEL. Low 24.255
4^ VEL. High 4^ VEL. 28.298
5^ . Low 32.707
5^ . High 5^ VEL. 38.159

267
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Speed in km/h at 2300 rpm (Version 40 Km/h)

Gearbox 100HP

40 REVERSE GEAR 20 REVERSE GEAR

REAR TYRES
16.9R34
FRONT TYRES
14.9R24
Km/h
1^ RID. Low 0.433
1^ RID. High 1^ RID. 0.529
2^ RID. Low 0.610
2^ RID. High 2^ RID. 0.711
3^ RID. Low 0.811
3^ RID. High 3^ RID. 0.947
4^ RID. Low 1.155
4^ RID.High 4^ RID. 1.348
1^ LEN. Low 1.541
5^ RID. Low 1.558
1^ LEN. High 1^ LEN. 1.798
5^ RID. High 5^ RID. 1.818
2^ LEN. Low 2.073
2^ LEN. High 2^ LEN. 2.419
3^ LEN. Low 2.758
3^ LEN. High 3^ LEN. 3.218
1^ MED. Low 3.329
1^ MED. High 1^ MED. 3.884
4^ LEN. Low 3.928
2^ MED. Low 4.477
4^ LEN. High 4^ LEN. 4.583
2^ MED. High 2^ MED. 5.224
5^ LEN. Low 5.297
3^ MED. Low 5.957
5^ Len. High 5^ Len. 6.180
3^ MED. High 3^ MED. 6.950
4^ . Low 8.483
4^ MED. High 4^ MED. 9.897
1^ VEL. Low 9.911
5^ MED. Low 11.440
1^ VEL. High 1^ VEL. 11.563
2^ VEL.Low 13.331
5^ MED. High 5^ MED. 13.347
2^ . High 2^ VEL. 15.553
3^ VEL. Low 17.736
3^ VEL. High 3^ VEL. 20.693
4^ VEL. Low 25.258
4^ VEL. High 4^ VEL. 29.469
5^ . Low 34.060
5^ . High 5^ VEL. 39.738

268
 A0 B0

85HP
Nß12 Nß2+2
360 M14x2x26 M18x2.5x30
==
1481
C0 D0
240
1401 ==
Nß2+2 Nß4+4
SECTION VIII

B0 1100 120 M18x2.5x25 M12x20

C0 ==
E0 F0

17
17

75

120

6
Nß4+4 Nß4+4
Asse motore
Engine M20x2.5x35 M12x1.75x24

38
38
G0 H0

112
A0

215
Nß4+4 Nß12

385
I0 M16x2x32 M16x2x38

I0
1278
Nß4
2347
M16x2x25
228
2422 265 ==
IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT POINTS

F0 H0

190
2766
120

85
45
146
198

65

2874.5
130
E0 ==
F0

85
G0

560
560

440
45

330
230
I0 3

550
EXPLORER 85 4CIL. 2WD/4WD

==

==
==
==

==
==
480
350
550
G0
170

290
100
D0 ==

269
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
 A0 B0

270
Nß12 Nß2+2
360 M14x2x26 M18x2.5x30

100HP
==
1509
C0 D0
240
1429 ==
Nß2+2 Nß5+5
B0 1128 120 M18x2.5x25 M12x20
SECTION VIII

C0 ==
E0 F0

17
17

75

120

6
Nß4+4 Nß8+8
Asse motore
Engine M20x2.5x35 M12x1.75x24

38
38
G0 H0

112
A0

215
Nß4+4 Nß14

385
I0 M16x2x32 M16x2x38

I0
1257
Nß4
1306
M16x2x25
2375 228
==
2450 280
IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT POINTS

F0 H0

190
120

2794

95
45
224

146
198

65

2902.5
130
E0 ==
F0

95
G0

560
560

440
45

330
230
620.5
I0 3

550
100 4CIL. 2WD/4WD

==

==
==
==

==
==
515.5

350
585.5
G0

420.5
170

290
100
D0 ==
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION VIII TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum trailerable loads

Tow implements WITHOUT BRAKES as follows:
- DO NOT exceed 30 km/h (18.6 mph)
- the weight of the towed implement, when fully laden, must NOT exceed
the weight of the towing tractor.
– Tow implements with MECHANICAL BRAKES as follows:
- DO NOT exceed 30 km/h (18.6 mph)
- the weight of the towed implement, when fully laden, must NOT
exceed 5000 kg (11023 lb).
– Tow implements with PNEUMATIC or HYDRAULIC BRAKES
activated from the tractor as follows:
- DO NOT exceed 40 km/h (24.9 mph)
- the weight of the towed implement, when fully laden, must NOT
exceed
4 times the weight of the towing tractor, with a maximum limit of
20000 kg
(44092 lb).

NOTE: the tractor should be equipped with a suitable automatic dual air
and hydraulic trailer braking system that must be connected to the trailer’s
hydraulic or air braking system.

271
SECTION IX FAULT DIAGNOSIS

SECTION 9 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Engine
Engine fails to turn over when starter operated
– Check battery charge level:
• If discharged, re-charge, otherwise clean the terminals and check
that the battery is properly installed.

– Faulty starter motor; have the defective parts replaced by an auto

electrician.

Engine difficult to start, or fails to re-start once stopped

– Check fuel level; inspect fuel filter and renew if necessary.
– Injection system faulty:
• Check for air in the fuel system and bleed if necessary. If the pro-
blem persists, check the calibration of the injection pump and the in-
jectors.

– Check the thermostarter; clean or replace as necessary.

– Poor compression: (operations to be carried out by a specialised ser-

vice centre only) check the valve clearances (0.2 mm/0.008 in - for en-
gine with air cooling system - 0.3 mm/0.012 in - for engine with water
cooling system). Inspect the valves and grind or replace as neces-
sary. Check head gasket and piston rings. If necessary, replace pi-
stons and cylinder liners.

White smoke from exhaust

– Check injection pump timing (operation to be carried out by a speciali-
sed service centre). Check valve stem to valve guide clearance. If the
problem persists, check piston rings and cylinder liners for wear and
replace if necessary.

– Inspect injectors (operation to be carried out by a specialised service

centre).

CAUTION: CAREFULLY READ ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CONTAINED IN THE OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS LISTED ON THE TRACTOR’S
DECALS.

272
SECTION IX FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Dark smoke from exhaust

– Check that the air filter element is clean:
• Clean or replace as necessary. Check the efficiency of the injec-
tors and calibrate if necessary. Check the calibration of the electro-
nic rpm control (operation to be carried out by a specialised
service centre).

Engine does not respond well to sudden acceleration

– Inspect the air filter element:
• Clean or replace as necessary.
– Inspect the fuel filter:
• Replace if necessary and bleed air from the system if necessary.

– Poor compression:
• Check valve clearances are (0.2 mm/0.008 in - for engine with air
cooling system - 0.3 mm/0.012 in - for engine with water cooling
system) in (operation to be carried out by a specialised service
centre); grind or replace valves as necessary. If the problem per-
sists, check piston rings and cylinder liners for wear and replace if
necesssary.

The engine does not run at a constant speed

– Check for water in the fuel system:
• Drain the fuel tanks and refill with clean fuel.
• Check the calibration of the injectors (operation to be carried out
by a specialised service centre).

Engine overheats
– Check drivebelt tensions:
• Adjust drivebelt tensions. Clean air intake grilles.
– Check the injection pump timing (operation to be carried out by a spe-
cialised service centre):
• Calibrate the pumps and, if necessary, the injectors.
• Check the pressure in the turbocharger outlet; clean the the turbo-
charger.

273
SECTION IX FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Gearbox

Difficulty in selecting and deselecting gears

– Check selection mechanism for wear:
• Adjust or replace worn parts (operation to be carried out at a spe-
cialised service centre).

Gears disengage during work

– Check that the gear lever travel is sufficient to engage the gear:
• Adjust gear lever travel (operation to be carried out by a speciali-
sed service centre).

– Check gears for wear:

• Replace worn parts (operation to be carried out by a specialised
service centre).

Noisy gearbox
– Check level and type of oil:
• Top up or change oil for recommended type.
– Check gear teeth and bearings for excessive wear:
• Replace worn parts (operation to be carried out by a specialised
service centre).

– Check backlash between crown wheel and pinion:

• Adjust backlash (operation to be carried out by a specialised servi-
ce centre).

Oil leaks
– Check that oil level is not too high:
• Restore correct level.
– Check that the breather valve is not blocked:
• Clean or replace as necessary.
– Check the oil seals for wear:
• Replace (operation to be carried out at a specialised service cen-
tre).

– Check gaskets:
• Replace (operation to be carried out at a specialised service cen-
tre).

274
SECTION IX FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Rear power take-off

(All checks of the front and rear P.T.O. must be carried by a specialised
service centre)

The clutch slips

– Check the clutch hydraulic system:
• Renew worn valve springs. Inspect and, if necessary, renew the
seal rings on the piston and the manifold. At the same time, check
that the piston slides freely.

– Inspect clutch disks for wear:

• Renew disks.
The clutch fails to disengage
– Check that the piston completes a full stroke:
• Check the control device, adjust or replace defective parts, inclu-
ding also the clutch disks if necessary.

– Piston stuck in housing:

• Remove any rough spots on the outer surface of the piston.
– P.T.O. fails to stop on disengaging the clutch:
• Poor sealing of piston; overhaul complete assembly.

Front driving axle

Excessive wear of universal joint cross journals
– Oil leaks:
• Oil breather clogged: clean. Check oil seals for wear and replace if
necessary (operations to be carried out by a specialised service
centre).

Worn tyres
– Check wheel toe-in (operation to be carried out by a specialised servi-
ce centre).

– Wheel oscillation:
• Check steering joints for wear and replace if necessary (operation
to be be carried out by a specialised service centre).

275
SECTION IX FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Brakes
Poor braking action
– Check for air in braking system:
• Bleed air and check adjustment of brake controls and disk wear
(adjustments to be carried out by a specialised service centre).

Braking action unbalanced

– Check for air in braking system:
• Bleed and check control adjustments (adjustments to be carried
out by a specialised service centre).

Brakes noisy
– Check adjustment:
• Adjust brakes and check that the brake fluid is of the specified type
(adjustments to be carried out by a specialised service centre).

Hydraulic lift
(All inspection and repairs of the hydraulic lift are to be carried out by a
specialised service centre)

The lift raises too slowly or fails to raise altogether

– Check that the lift is not overloaded.
– Check that the pump is functioning correctly:
• Check that the oil is of the specified type and that the oil level is
correct. Inspect pump and renew any worn parts. Check safety val-
ve settings.

The lift is only partially raised

– Check lift adjustments.
The lift is lowered too slowly
– Check that the “lowering” valve is not sticking.
The lift oscillates rhythmically
– Check adjustment and pressure relief valve settings.

276
SECTION IX FAULT DIAGNOSIS

When the lift arms are raised to maximum height, the pressure relief valve
discharges continuously
– Check adjustment.
– Control valve spool worn (with internal leaking).

Auxiliary hydraulic systems

Implements connected to the hydraulic system do not operate correctly

– Implements not suited to characteristics of the hydraulic system.

– Fault in the hydraulic lift system. See lift unit.

– Incorrect type/quantity of oil in the circuit: change and/or top up tran-

smission oil.

– Oil filters clogged: renew filters.

– Oil pump worn or defective: overhaul or replace as necessary (opera-

tions to be carried out by a specialised service centre).

– Safety valve setting incorrect:

• Check valve pressure setting and adjust if necessary (operations
to be carried out by a specialised service centre).

– Incorrect adjustment of control levers:

• Adjust (operations to be carried out by a specialised service centre).

Excessive noise from system (with vibration of system pipes )

– Air in system:
• Check tightness of fittings and seals
– Interference between pipes (visual inspection):
• Move the pipes so that they are not in contact with other pipes or
components.

277
SECTION IX FAULT DIAGNOSIS

Oil leaks
– Pipe fittings worked loose: tighten.
– Seals defective: replace.

– Pipes damaged: replace.

Automatic centering device does not function correctly

– Internal components damaged or sticking:
• Overhaul the automatic centering device; replace any defective
parts (operations to be carried out by a specialised service centre).

Incorrect adjustment of control levers

– Adjust correctly (operations to be carried out by a specialised service
centre):

– Automatic centering device defective or incorrectly adjusted:

• Overhaul centering device (operation to be carried out by a specia-
lised service centre).

Diagnostics socket
On the right-hand side of the instrument panel there is a socket to which
the special tester may be connected for electronic system diagnostics.
This operation should be carried out by a specialised service centre.

278
NOTES

279
 APPENDIX
IMPORTANT! ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Combination of tractor and mounted implement

A
APPENDIX Combination of tractor and mounted implement

Combination of tractor and mounted implement

The mounting of implements on the front or rear
three point linkage shall not result in exceeding the
maximum permissible weight, the permissible axle
loads and the tyre load carrying capacities of the
tractor. The front axle of the tractor must always to
be loaded with at least 20% of the unladen weight of
the tractor.
Make sure before buying an implement that
these conditions are fulfilled by carrying out
the following calculations or by weighing the
tractor/implement combination.

Determination of the total weight, the axle loads, the tyre load car-
rying capacity and the necessary minimum ballasting

For the calculation you need the following data and see the table of page E:
TL [kg (lb)] Unladen weight of tractor
TV [kg (lb)] Front axle load of unladen tractor
TH [kg (lb)] Rear axle load of unladen tractor
GH [kg (lb)] Combined weight of rear mounted implement/rear ballast
GV [kg (lb)] Combined weight of front mounted implement/front bal-
last
a [mm (in)] Distance from centre of gravity for combined front
mounte dimplement/front ballast to front axle centre
b [mm (in)] Tractor wheelbase
c [mm (in)] Distance from rear axle centre to centre of lower link balls
d [mm (in)] Distance from centre of lower link balls to centre of gravity
for combined rear mounted implement/rear ballast
B
APPENDIX Combination of tractor and mounted implement

Consideration of rear mounted implement and front/rear combinations

1 ) Calculation of minimum ballasting at the front GV min

Record the calculated minimum ballasting which is needed at the front of

the tractor into the table.

Front mounted implement

2) Calculation of the minimum ballasting at the rear G H min

Record the calculated minimum ballasting which is needed at the rear of

the tractor into the table.

3) Calculation of the real front axle load T V tot

(If with the front mounted implement (G ) the required minimum front
V

ballasting (G ), cannot be reached, the weight of the front mounted

V min

implement has to be increased to the weight of the minimum ballasting at

the front!)

Record the calculated real front axle load and the permissible front axle
load of the tractor into the table.

4) Calculation of the real total weight G tot

(If with the rear mounted implement (G ) the required minimum rear
H

ballasting (G ) cannot be reached, the weight of the rear mounted

H m i n

implements has to be increased to at least the weight of the minimum

ballasting at the rear!)

Record the calculated real and the permissible total weight given in the
instruction handbook for the tractor into the table.

C
APPENDIX Combination of tractor and mounted implement

5) Calculation of the real rear axle load T H tot

Record the calculated real and the permissible rear axle load given in the
instruction handbook for the tractor into the table.

6) Tyre load carrying capacity

Record double the value (two tyres) of the permissible load carrying
capacity into the table (see for instance documentation provided by the
tyre manufacturer).

Real value Permissible value Double permissible

TABLE according according to tyre load carrying
to calculation instruction handbook capacity (two tyres)

Minimum
Ballasting
Front/rear Kg (lb) --- ---

Total weight Kg (lb) ≤ Kg (lb) ---

Front axle load Kg (lb) ≤ Kg (lb) ≤ Kg (lb)

Rear axle load Kg (lb) ≤ Kg (lb) ≤ Kg (lb)

The minimum ballasting has to be attached to the tractor either in

form of a mounted implement or ballasting weight!

The calculated values must be less or equal ( ) the permissible

values!

D
APPENDIX Combination of tractor and mounted implement

85HP 100HP(2WD) 100HP(4WD)

T_L 3580 3440 3680

T_V V 2400 1600 3600
T_H H 3300 2800 3600
GH Variable Variable
GV Variable Variable
a Variable Variable
b 2280 2410 2320
c 1 1 1
d Variable Variable

E
 Index
A
A Word to the Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV
Access flap providing an opening through which cables for
external equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Access to the driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Adjustable track wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Adjusting steering stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Adjusting the driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Adjusting the rearview mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Adjusting the steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adjustment of the lifting rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adjustment of the telescopic stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Adjustment of the top link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Attachment of implements to the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Auxiliary hydraulic services control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

B
Ballast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Ballast weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Ballasting by filling the tyres with water + antifreeze
solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Bleeding air from the fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Bleeding air from the hydraulic system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Brake control pedals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

C
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIV,118
Cab ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Category 2 rear drawbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV
CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XII
Changing the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Changing the engine oil filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Check the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXVII
Checking operation of the differential lock controls . . . 206
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Checking the level of coolant in the expansion tank . . 186
Checking the tractor prior to starting work . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Class “C” towing hitch with automatic height
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Class “D2" and ”D" towing hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Clean the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIX
Cleaning the air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Cleaning the headlights and sidelights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Clutch control pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Cold starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Combination of tractor and mounted implement . . . . . . . B
Control pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Controls located in the cab roof lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Conversion tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIX

D
Damage to the ROPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIV
Danger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV
Decals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XVI
Dial-type engine temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dial-type fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DIGITAL CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Draining water from the fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

E
Economic - 750 rpm power take-off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Electronic dial-type rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Emergency starting through auxiliary battery . . . . . . . . . 38
Engine - first 100 work hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

F
FAULT DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Follow a Safety Programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XVII
Front and rear working lights in cab roof . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Front axle 2wd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Front ballast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Front hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Front power take-off (1000 r.p.m.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Front sidelights and direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Front wheel track adjustment (2-W.D. Tractor). . . . . . . 150
Front-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fuel storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,227

G
Gearbox with hydraulic shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Gearshifting positions with 5 speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
General cleaning of the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
General Operating Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXXVIII
General safety rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XVII
Greasing the steering cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Ground speed power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

H
Hazard warning sign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Headlight alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Hi engagement pilot lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
High-visibility roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Hydraulic trailer braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
IMPORTANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X
IMPORTANT! ADDITIONAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . A
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Interior courtesy light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
International symbols (part. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV
Introduction to Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV

K
Know Your Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXVI

L
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Lo engagement pilot lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
LOAD SENSING» MECHANICAL LIFT ORIGINAL
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Lubrificants and fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

M
Maintenance and inspection schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Maintenance intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Maintenance of the 3-point linkage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Maintenance of the air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . 220
Maintenance of the climate control system. . . . . . . . . . 216
Maintenance of the front and rear brakes. . . . . . . . . . . 207
Maintenance of the front driving axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Maintenance of the front P.T.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Maintenance of the gearbox, differential and rear reduction
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,196
Maintenance of the heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Maintenance of the hydrostatic power steering . . . . . . 201
Maintenance of the rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Maximum trailerable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Mechanical ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Metric conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVIII
Mixed-automatic air braking system (optional) . . . . . . . 157

O
Operations prior to garaging the tractor for a long period
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

P
Permissible tyre combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Prepare for Safe Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXV
Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Protect the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIX
Protection and safety devices on the tractor. . . . . . . . . . 60
Protective Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIII

R
Radio AM/FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Rear and front differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Rear ballast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Rear hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rear light assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Rear power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Removing the side panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Risk of Overturning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXXVI
Roll Over Protective Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIII
Row crop tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Running direction of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

S
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XIV,XV
Safety Alert Symbol and Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XIV
Safety and operational decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XLV
Safety instructions for the installation of supplementary
equipment and/or electronic components. . . . . . . . . . XLIV
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SECTION 1 - Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XIV
SECTION 2 - REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SECTION 3 - USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SECTION 4 - WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
SECTION 5 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS . . . . . . . 161
SECTION 6 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
SECTION 7 - STORAGE OF THE TRACTOR . . . . . . . 246
SECTION 8 - TECHNICAL DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
SECTION 9 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
SEPARATE BRAKES” valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Servicing the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX
Setting parameters with control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Standard cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Start Safely. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXXI
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX
Starting Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXXII
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
STORAGE OF THE TRACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Sun roll-up canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Symbols on the fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

T
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Three-point linkage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
To the owner of the new DEUTZ-FAHR tractor. . . . . . . . XI
Tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Towing hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Track adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Track width adjustment for wheels with adjustable
rims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tractor serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Turbocharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Tyre inflation pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

U
USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

W
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV
Wedge support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Wheel chock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Width of rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Windscreen and rear screen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Any reproduction, including partial, of the text and illustrations in this
publication is prohibited.

We reserve the right to modify the tractor at any time, while maintaining the
essential characteristics of the product. The data reported in this
publication are thus also subject to variation and consequently are not
binding.

10/2006 cod. 307.7332.3.6

By Personal Computing Technical Publications Dept.
307. 7332. 3. 6

10/2006